Konica Minolta bizhub C353 Service Manual
  1. Manuals
  2. Brands
  3. Konica Minolta Manuals
  4. All in One Printer
  5. bizhub C353 Series
  6. Service manual

Konica Minolta bizhub C353 Service Manual

Field service
Hide thumbs Also See for bizhub C353:
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
80
81
82
83
84
85
86
87
88
89
90
91
92
93
94
95
96
97
98
99
100
101
102
103
104
105
106
107
108
109
110
111
112
113
114
115
116
117
118
119
120
121
122
123
124
125
126
127
128
129
130
131
132
133
134
135
136
137
138
139
140
141
142
143
144
145
146
147
148
149
150
151
152
153
154
155
156
157
158
159
160
161
162
163
164
165
166
167
168
169
170
171
172
173
174
175
176
177
178
179
180
181
182
183
184
185
186
187
188
189
190
191
192
193
194
195
196
197
198
199
200
201
202
203
204
205
206
207
208
209
210
211
212
213
214
215
216
217
218
219
220
221
222
223
224
225
226
227
228
229
230
231
232
233
234
235
236
237
238
239
240
241
242
243
244
245
246
247
248
249
250
251
252
253
254
255
256
257
258
259
260
261
262
263
264
265
266
267
268
269
270
271
272
273
274
275
276
277
278
279
280
281
282
283
284
285
286
287
288
289
290
291
292
293
294
295
296
297
298
299
300
301
302
303
304
305
306
307
308
309
310
311
312
313
314
315
316
317
318
319
320
321
322
323
324
325
326
327
328
329
330
331
332
333
334
335
336
337
338
339
340
341
342
343
344
345
346
347
348
349
350
351
352
353
354
355
356
357
358
359
360
361
362
363
364
365
366
367
368
369
370
371
372
373
374
375
376
377
378
379
380
381
382
383
384
385
386
387
388
389
390
391
392
393
394
395
396
397
398
399
400
401
402
403
404
405
406
407
408
409
410
411
412
413
414
415
416
417
418
419
420
421
422
423
424
425
426
427
428
429
430
431
432
433
434
435
436
437
438
439
440
441
442
443
444
445
446
447
448
449
450
451
452
453
454
455
456
457
458
459
460
461
462
463
464
465
466
467
468
469
470
471
472
473
474
475
476
477
478
479
480
481
482
483
484
485
486
487
488
489
490
491
492
493
494
495
496
497
498
499
500
501
502
503
504
505
506
507
508
509
510
511
512
513
514
515
516
517
518
519
520
521
522
523
524
525
526
527
528
529
530
531
532
533
534
535
536
537
538
539
540
541
542
543
544
545
546
547
548
549
550
551
552
553
554
555
556
557
558
559
560
561
562
563
564
565
566
567
568
569
570
571
572
573
574
575
576
577
578
579
580
581
582
583
584
585
586
587
588
589
590
591
592
593
594
595
596
597
598
599
600
601
602
603
604
605
606
607
608
609
610
611
612
613
614
615
616
617
618
619
620
621
622
623
624
625
626
627
628
629
630
631
632
633
634
635
636
637
638
639
640
641
642
643
644
645
646
647
648
649
650
651
652
653
654
655
656
657
658
659
660
661
662
663
664
665
666
667
668
669
670
671
672
673
674
675
676
677
678
679
680
681
682
683
684
685
686
687
688
689
690
691
692
693
694
695
696
697
698
699
700
701
702
703
704
705
706
707
708
709
710
711
712
713
714
715
716
717
718
719
720
721
722
723
724
725
726
727
728
729
730
731
732
733
734
735
736
737
738
739
740
741
742
743
744
745
746
747
748
749
750
751
752
753
754
755
756
757
758
759
760
761
762
763
764
765
766
767
768
769
770
771
772
773
774
775
776
777
778
779
780
781
782
783
784
785
786
787
788
789
790
791
792
793
794
795
796
797
798
799
800
801
802
803
804
805
806
807
808
809
810
811
812
813
814
815
816
817
818
819
820
821
822
823
824
825
826
827
828
829
830
831
832
833
834
835
836
837
838
839
840
841
842
843
844
845
846
847
848
849
850
851
852
853
854
855
856
857
858
859
860
861
862
863
864
865
866
867
868
869
870
871
872
873
874
875
876
877
878
879
880
881
882
883
884
885
886
887
888
889
890
891
892
893
894
895
896
897
898
899
900
901
902
903
904
905
906
907
908
909
910
911
912
913
914
915
916
917
918
919
920
921
922
923
924
925
926
927
928
929
930
931
932
933
934
935
936
937
938
939
940
941
942
943
944
945
946
947
948
949
950
951
952
953
954
955
956
957
958
959
960
961
962
963
964
965
966
967
968
969
970
971
972
973
974
975
976
977
978
979
980
981
982
983
984
985
986
987
988
989
990
Table of Contents

Advertisement

Quick Links

See also: Operating Manual , System Administrator Manual
SERVICE MANUAL
This service manual is designed for machine with
This service manual is designed for machine with
firmware card ver. J8 and onward.
firmware card ver. J8 and onward.
FIELD SERVICE
2008.06
2008.06
Ver. 4.0
Ver. 4.0

Advertisement

Table of Contents
loading

Related Manuals for Konica Minolta bizhub C353

Summary of Contents for Konica Minolta bizhub C353

  • Page 1 SERVICE MANUAL FIELD SERVICE This service manual is designed for machine with This service manual is designed for machine with firmware card ver. J8 and onward. firmware card ver. J8 and onward. 2008.06 2008.06 Ver. 4.0 Ver. 4.0...

  • Page 2: Table Of Contents

    WARNING INDICATIONS ON THE MACHINE ............S-18 MEASURES TO TAKE IN CASE OF AN ACCIDENT ............S-20 Composition of the service manual ................. C-1 Notation of the service manual ..................C-2 bizhub C353/C253/C203 Main body Outline ..........................1 Maintenance ......................... 11 Adjustment/Setting...................... 191 Troubleshooting......................
  • Page 3 PC-405 Outline ..........................1 Maintenance ........................3 Adjustment/Setting ....................... 21 Troubleshooting ......................29 FS-519/PK-515/OT-602 Outline ..........................1 Maintenance ........................7 Adjustment/Setting ....................... 59 Troubleshooting ......................73 MT-502 Outline ..........................1 Maintenance ........................3 Adjustment/Setting ......................7 Troubleshooting ......................11 SD-505 Outline ..........................

  • Page 4: Safety And Important Warning Items

    IMPORTANT NOTICE Because of possible hazards to an inexperienced person servicing this product as well as the risk of damage to the product, KONICA MINOLTA BUSINESS TECHNOLOGIES, INC. (hereafter called the KMBT) strongly recommends that all servicing be performed only by KMBT-trained service technicians.

  • Page 5: Safety Warnings

    [1] MODIFICATIONS NOT AUTHORIZED BY KONICA MINOLTA BUSINESS TECHNOLOGIES, INC. KONICA MINOLTA brand products are renowned for their high reliability. This reliability is achieved through high-quality design and a solid service network. Product design is a highly complicated and delicate process where numerous mechanical, physical, and electrical aspects have to be taken into consideration, with the aim of arriving at proper tolerances and safety factors.
  • Page 6 SAFETY AND IMPORTANT WARNING ITEMS [2] POWER PLUG SELECTION In some countries or areas, the power plug provided with the product may not fit wall outlet used in the area. In that case, it is obligation of customer engineer (hereafter called the CE) to attach appropriate power plug or power cord set in order to connect the product to the supply.

  • Page 7: Checkpoints When Performing On-Site Service

    SAFETY AND IMPORTANT WARNING ITEMS [3] CHECKPOINTS WHEN PERFORMING ON-SITE SERVICE KONICA MINOLTA brand products are extensively tested before shipping, to ensure that all applicable safety standards are met, in order to protect the customer and customer engi- neer (hereafter called the CE) from the risk of injury. However, in daily use, any electrical equipment may be subject to parts wear and eventual failure.
  • Page 8 SAFETY AND IMPORTANT WARNING ITEMS Power Plug and Cord WARNING • When using the power cord set (inlet type) that came with this product, make sure the connector is securely inserted in the inlet of the product. When securing measure is provided, secure the cord with the fixture properly.
  • Page 9 SAFETY AND IMPORTANT WARNING ITEMS Wiring WARNING • Never use multi-plug adapters to plug multiple power cords in the same outlet. If used, the risk of fire exists. • When an extension cord is required, use a specified one. Current that can flow in the extension cord is limited, so using a too long extension cord may result in fire.
  • Page 10 SAFETY AND IMPORTANT WARNING ITEMS Ventilation CAUTION • The product generates ozone gas during operation, but it will not be harmful to the human body. If a bad smell of ozone is present in the following cases, ventilate the room. a.
  • Page 11 SAFETY AND IMPORTANT WARNING ITEMS Work Performed with the Product Powered On WARNING • Take every care when making adjustments or performing an operation check with the product powered. If you make adjustments or perform an operation check with the external cover detached, you may touch live or high-voltage parts or you may be caught in moving gears or the timing belt, leading to a risk of injury.
  • Page 12 SAFETY AND IMPORTANT WARNING ITEMS Safety Checkpoints WARNING • Check electrode units such as a charging corona unit for deterioration and sign of leakage. Current can leak, leading to a risk of trouble or fire. • Before disassembling or adjusting the write unit (P/H unit) incorporating a laser, make sure that the power cord has been disconnected.

  • Page 13: Handling Of Consumables

    SAFETY AND IMPORTANT WARNING ITEMS Safety Checkpoints WARNING • Make sure that all screws, components, wiring, connec- tors, etc. that were removed for safety check and mainte- nance have been reinstalled in the original location. (Pay special attention to forgotten connectors, pinched cables, forgotten screws, etc.) A risk of product trouble, electric shock, and fire exists.
  • Page 14 SAFETY AND IMPORTANT WARNING ITEMS Handling of Service Materials CAUTION • Use only a small amount of cleaner at a time and take care not to spill any liquid. If this happens, immediately wipe it off. A risk of fire exists. •...
  • Page 15 SAFETY AND IMPORTANT WARNING ITEMS [4] Used Batteries Precautions ALL Areas CAUTION Danger of explosion if battery is incorrectly replaced. Replace only with the same or equivalent type recommended by the manufacturer. Dispose of used batteries according to the manufacturer’s instructions. Germany VORSICHT! Explosionsgefahr bei unsachgemäßem Austausch der Batterie.

  • Page 16: Internal Laser Radiation

    Internal Laser Radiation semiconductor laser Maximum power of the laser diode 30 mW 11.6 µW bizhub C353 Maximum average radiation power (*) 7.7 µW bizhub C253/C203 Wavelength 775-800 nm *at laser aperture of the print head unit •...
  • Page 17 SAFETY AND IMPORTANT WARNING ITEMS U.S.A., Canada (CDRH Regulation) • This machine is certified as a Class 1 Laser product under Radiation Performance Stan- dard according to the Food, Drug and Cosmetic Act of 1990. Compliance is mandatory for Laser products marketed in the United States and is reported to the Center for Devices and Radiological Health (CDRH) of the U.S.
  • Page 18 SAFETY AND IMPORTANT WARNING ITEMS Finland, Sweden LUOKAN 1 LASERLAITE KLASS 1 LASER APPARAT VAROITUS! • Laitteen käyttäminen muulla kuin tässä käyttöohjeessa mainitulla tavalla saat- taa altistaa käyttäjän turvallisuusluokan 1 ylittävälle näkymättömälle laser- säteilylle. puolijohdelaser Laserdiodin suurin teho 30 mW aallonpituus 775-800 nm VARNING!

  • Page 19: Laser Safety Label

    SAFETY AND IMPORTANT WARNING ITEMS Laser Safety Label • A laser safety label is attached to the inside of the machine as shown below. *Only for the U.S.A. A02EP0E505DA Laser Caution Label • A laser caution label is attached to the outside of the machine as shown below. A02EP0C503DA S-16...

  • Page 20: Precautions For Handling The Laser Equipment

    SAFETY AND IMPORTANT WARNING ITEMS PRECAUTIONS FOR HANDLING THE LASER EQUIPMENT • When laser protective goggles are to be used, select ones with a lens conforming to the above specifications. • When a disassembly job needs to be performed in the laser beam path, such as when working around the printerhead and PC drum, be sure first to turn the printer OFF.

  • Page 21: Warning Indications On The Machine

    SAFETY AND IMPORTANT WARNING ITEMS WARNING INDICATIONS ON THE MACHINE Caution labels shown are attached in some areas on/in the machine. When accessing these areas for maintenance, repair, or adjustment, special care should be taken to avoid burns and electric shock. CAUTION The area around the fusing unit is extremely hot.
  • Page 22 SAFETY AND IMPORTANT WARNING ITEMS High voltage This area generates high voltage. Be careful not to touch here when the power is turned ON to avoid getting an electric shock. High voltage This area generates high voltage. Be careful not to touch here when the power is turned ON to avoid getting an electric shock.

  • Page 23: Measures To Take In Case Of An Accident

    MEASURES TO TAKE IN CASE OF AN ACCIDENT MEASURES TO TAKE IN CASE OF AN ACCIDENT 1. If an accident has occurred, the distributor who has been notified first must immediately take emergency measures to provide relief to affected persons and to prevent further damage.

  • Page 24: Composition Of The Service Manual

    Composition of the service manual This service manual consists of Theory of Operation section and Field Service section to explain the main machine and its corresponding options. Theory of Operation section gives, as information for the CE to get a full understanding of the product, a rough outline of the object and role of each function, the relationship between the electrical system and the mechanical system, and the timing of operation of each part.

  • Page 25: Notation Of The Service Manual

    Notation of the service manual A. Product name In this manual, each of the products is described as follows: (1) bizhub C353/C253/C203: Main body (2) Microsoft Windows NT 4.0: Windows NT 4.0 or Windows NT Microsoft Windows 2000: Windows 2000...
  • Page 26 SERVICE MANUAL FIELD SERVICE 2008.06 Ver. 4.0...

  • Page 27: Revision History

    Revision history After publication of this service manual, the parts and mechanism may be subject to change for improvement of their performance. Therefore, the descriptions given in this service manual may not coincide with the actual machine. When any change has been made to the descriptions in the service manual, a revised version will be issued with a revision mark added as required.
  • Page 28 Field Service Ver. 4.0 Jun. 2008 CONTENTS bizhub C353/C253/C203 Main body Outline System configuration....................1 Product specifications ..................... 3 Maintenance Periodical check ....................11 Maintenance items....................11 3.1.1 Main body ....................11 3.1.2 DF-611 ......................13 3.1.3 PC-104/204/405 ..................13 3.1.4...
  • Page 29 Field Service Ver. 4.0 Jun. 2008 3.4.14 Replacing the ozone filter ................39 3.4.15 Replacing the toner cartridge ..............39 3.4.16 Replacing the transfer belt unit ..............41 3.4.17 Cleaning of the image transfer entrance guide ........... 43 3.4.18 Cleaning of the IDC/registration sensor/MK,YC ......... 43 3.4.19 Replacing the fusing unit ................
  • Page 30 Field Service Ver. 4.0 Jun. 2008 5.6.4 Firmware rewriting ..................72 5.6.5 Error code list for the Internet ISW.............. 74 Other ........................77 Disassembly/adjustment prohibited items ............77 Disassembly/assembly/cleaning list (other parts)..........78 6.2.1 Disassembly/assembly parts list ..............78 6.2.2 Cleaning parts list ..................
  • Page 31 Field Service Ver. 4.0 Jun. 2008 6.3.30 Scanner assy .................... 110 6.3.31 Hard disk drive (HDD)................112 6.3.32 Main drive unit ..................112 6.3.33 Transport drive unit ................... 114 6.3.34 Fusing drive unit ..................118 6.3.35 Hopper drive unit (C/K, Y/M)..............120 6.3.36 Right door assy..................
  • Page 32 Field Service Ver. 4.0 Jun. 2008 6.3.67 Paper feed tray 1 paper feed clutch (CL1) ..........161 6.3.68 Paper feed tray 2 vertical transport clutch (CL3)........162 6.3.69 Paper feed tray 2 paper feed clutch (CL2) ..........163 6.3.70 Manual paper feed clutch (CL4)..............163 6.3.71 Transfer belt retraction clutch (CL7) ............
  • Page 33 Field Service Ver. 4.0 Jun. 2008 8.4.2 Create User Box ..................206 8.4.3 Limiting Access to Destinations ..............207 User Settings ....................208 8.5.1 System Settings..................208 8.5.2 Custom Display Settings................212 8.5.3 Copier Settings ..................215 8.5.4 Scan/Fax Settings..................219 8.5.5 Default Scan/Fax Settings ................
  • Page 34 Field Service Ver. 4.0 Jun. 2008 10.4.6 Printer Resist Loop ................... 357 10.4.7 Color Registration Adjustment ..............358 10.4.8 Exhaust Fan Stop Delay................359 10.4.9 LD adjustment................... 359 10.4.10 Manual Bypass Tray Adjustment ............... 361 10.4.11 Lead Edge Erase Adjustment ..............361 10.4.12 Split Line Prior Detection ................
  • Page 35 Field Service Ver. 4.0 Jun. 2008 10.8.8 Initialization ....................391 10.8.9 Trouble Isolation..................392 10.8.10 IU Life Setting ................... 393 10.8.11 Change Warm Up Time ................394 10.8.12 Machine State LED Setting............... 395 10.9 System 2 ......................396 10.9.1 HDD ......................396 10.9.2 Image Controller Setting ................
  • Page 36 Field Service Ver. 4.0 Jun. 2008 10.11.5 Protocol Trace ................... 409 10.11.6 Fax Setting List ..................409 10.11.7 Fax Analysis List ..................409 10.12 State Confirmation.................... 410 10.12.1 Sensor Check.................... 410 10.12.2 Sensor check screens................411 10.12.3 Sensor check list ..................415 10.12.4 Table Number....................
  • Page 37 Field Service Ver. 4.0 Jun. 2008 10.17.3 FTP Setting....................434 10.17.4 Forwarding Access Setting ............... 435 10.17.5 Download....................436 Enhanced Security....................437 11.1 Enhanced Security function setting procedure..........437 11.1.1 Procedure ....................437 11.1.2 Exiting ....................... 437 11.2 Enhanced Security function tree ..............437 11.3 Settings in the Enhanced Security ..............
  • Page 38 Field Service Ver. 4.0 Jun. 2008 14.2.2 Centering adjustment of the tray 1, 2 ............459 14.2.3 Adjustment of the manual bypass tray paper size unit......460 14.3 PH unit mechanical adjustment ................ 461 14.3.1 Skew adjustment..................461 Troubleshooting Jam display ......................463 15.1 Misfeed display ....................
  • Page 39 Field Service Ver. 4.0 Jun. 2008 16.2.13 P-30: Color PC drive sensor malfunction..........485 16.2.14 P-31: Black PC drive sensor malfunction..........485 16.3 Trouble code ..................... 486 16.3.1 Trouble code list ..................486 16.4 How to reset ..................... 515 16.5 Solution ......................516 16.5.1 C0202: Tray 1 feeder up/down abnormality ..........
  • Page 40 Field Service Ver. 4.0 Jun. 2008 16.5.33 C2A04: EEPROM access error (TC K) ............. 525 16.5.34 C3101: Fusing roller separation failure ............. 526 16.5.35 C3201: Fusing motor failure to turn ............526 16.5.36 C3202: Fusing motor turning at abnormal timing........526 16.5.37 C3301: Fusing cooling fan motor/ 1 failure to turn ........
  • Page 41 Field Service Ver. 4.0 Jun. 2008 16.5.70 CA051: Standard controller configuration failure ........537 16.5.71 CA052: Controller hardware error............. 537 16.5.72 CA053: Controller start failure ..............537 16.5.73 CC001: Vendor connection failure ............538 16.5.74 CC151: ROM contents error upon startup (MSC)........538 16.5.75 CC152: ROM contents error upon startup (Scanner) .......
  • Page 42 Field Service Ver. 4.0 Jun. 2008 16.5.107 CD203: Memory capacity discrepancy 2 ..........542 16.5.108 CD211: PCI-SDRAM DMA operation failure ..........543 16.5.109 CD212: Compression/extraction timeout detection........543 16.5.110 CD231: No Fax memory at FAX board mounting........543 16.5.111 CD241: Encryption board setting error ............. 543 16.5.112 CD242: Encryption board mounting error ..........
  • Page 43 Field Service Ver. 4.0 Jun. 2008 18.1 How to read element date ................553 18.1.1 Table number .................... 554 18.1.2 Level history 1................... 555 18.1.3 Level history 2................... 556 18.2 How to identify problematic part ............... 557 18.2.1 Initial check items ..................557 18.3 Solution ......................
  • Page 44 Field Service Ver. 4.0 Jun. 2008 18.3.26 Printer monocolor: uneven image ............. 587 18.3.27 Printer 4-color: white lines in sub scan direction, white bands in sub scan direction, colored lines in sub scan direction, and colored bands in sub scan direction ....................
  • Page 45 Field Service Ver. 4.0 Jun. 2008 21.2.1 1-sided mode .................... 627 21.2.2 2-sided mode .................... 628 xviii...

  • Page 46: Outline

    Field Service Ver. 4.0 Jun. 2008 1. System configuration Outline System configuration 1/2 System front view [17] [18] [16] [14] [13] [15] [12] [11] [10] A02ET2E501AB Main body [10] Finisher FS-609 Reverse Automatic document feeder [11] Punch kit PK-501 DF-611 Original cover OC-507 [12]...
  • Page 47 Authentication unit (IC card type) AU-201 Scan accelerator kit SA-501 [14] i-Option LK-101/102/103 Fax multi line ML-501 [15] Upgrade kit UK-201 Local interface kit EK-603 *1: Only for bizhub C353/C253, VI-504 and IC-409 are available with upgraded firmware that includes function enhancement.

  • Page 48: Product Specifications

    Field Service Ver. 4.0 Jun. 2008 2. Product specifications Product specifications A. Type Type Desktop/console *1 scanner/printer Printing process Laser electrostatic printing system PC drum type OPC drum: KM-12 (OPC with high mold releasability) Scanning density 600 dpi Exposure lamp White rare-gas fluorescent lamp 30 W Platen Stationary (mirror scan)
  • Page 49 Thick 3, Thick 4, C353, C253, C203: 55.5 mm/s Post card, Envelope, Label sheet Copying speed for C353: 1-sided: 35 copies/min, 2-sided: 35 copies/min multi-copy cycle Monochrome, Full C253: 1-sided: 25 copies/min, 2-sided: 25 copies/min (A4 or 8 x 11, plain...
  • Page 50 Field Service Ver. 4.0 Jun. 2008 2. Product specifications Paper size Metric area A3 to B5/B5S, A5S, 16K, 8K Tray 1 11 x 17 to 8 x 11, 8 x 11S, Inch area S, 8 x 13 Metric area A3 to B5/B5S, A3 wide,16K, 8K Tray 2 12 x 18 to 8 x 11, 8...
  • Page 51 : Only the plain paper weighing 64 to 90 g/m (17 to 24 lb) or thick paper weighing 91 to 256 g/m (24.25 to 68 lb) are reliably fed. D. Maintenance • bizhub C353 Color print 1,800 prints No. of pages printed per month (average) Monochrome print...
  • Page 52 Field Service Ver. 4.0 Jun. 2008 2. Product specifications E. Machine specifications Voltage: AC 100 V, 120 V, 127 V, 220-240 V Current: 100 V 15 A 110 V 15 A Power requirements 120 V 12 A 127 V 12 A 230 V 50/60 Hz ±...
  • Page 53 2. Product specifications Field Service Ver. 4.0 Jun. 2008 G. Print functions Type Built-in type controller C353 35 prints/min (color/monochrome, A4, 1-sided) Print speed C253 25 prints/min (color/monochrome, A4, 1-sided) C203 20 prints/min (color/monochrome, A4, 1-sided) C353 5.9 sec. or less (monochrome, A4)
  • Page 54 15 to 85 % requirements Latin 80 fonts Fonts Latin 137 fonts H. Scan functions Driver KONICA MINOLTA scanner driver Compatible operating Windows / NT4.0 SP6 / 2000 / XP/Vista systems Scan speed Monochrome, Full color 70 pages/min (Resolution 300 dpi)
  • Page 55 2. Product specifications Field Service Ver. 4.0 Jun. 2008 Blank Page...

  • Page 56: Maintenance

    [Service mode] → [Counter] → [Life]. 3.1.1 Main body A. Parts to be replaced by users (CRU) Descrip- Class Parts to be replaced Cycle Clean Replace tions C353:90,000 ● Imaging unit Y,M,C C253:75,000 C203:55,000 C353:120,000 ● Imaging unit K C253:100,000 C203:70,000...
  • Page 57 3. Periodical check Field Service Ver. 4.0 Jun. 2008 C. Periodical parts replacement/cleaning 1 (per 150,000-print) Lubri- Descrip- Class Parts to be replaced Check Clean Replace cation tions Paper feed and image ⎯ ● conditions Overall ⎯ ● ● Appearance Image transfer entrance ⎯...
  • Page 58 Field Service Ver. 4.0 Jun. 2008 3. Periodical check 3.1.2 DF-611 A. Maintenance call (per 50,000-original feed) Lubri- Descrip- Class Parts to be replaced Check Clean Replace cation tions Paper feed and image ⎯ ● conditions Overall ⎯ ● ● Appearance ⎯...
  • Page 59 3. Periodical check Field Service Ver. 4.0 Jun. 2008 3.1.4 FS-519 A. Periodical parts replacement/cleaning 1 (per 300,000-print) Lubri- Descrip- Class Parts to be replaced Check Clean Replace cation tions Paper feed and image ⎯ ● conditions Overall ⎯ ● ●...

  • Page 60: Maintenance Parts

    • Replace with reference to the numeric values displayed on the Life counter. • Maintenance conditions are based on the case of A4 or 8 x 11, standard mode and low power mode OFF. Color bizhub C353 4 pages per job 4 pages per job *Standard mode bizhub C253...
  • Page 61 3. Periodical check Field Service Ver. 4.0 Jun. 2008 *4: A waste toner full condition is detected with detecting the actual waste toner emissions. *5: Because there is no life-counter for the transfer roller unit, substitute it by the life-counter of the transfer belt unit.

  • Page 62: Cleaning Parts

    Field Service Ver. 4.0 Jun. 2008 3. Periodical check 3.2.2 Cleaning parts Descrip No. Classification Parts name Actual cleaning cycle *1 Ref.Page tions Processing When toner cartridge C/M/Y is Electrostatic charger wire P.20 section replaced Conveyance Timing roller Upon each call (60,000) P.20 section Area around the waste...

  • Page 63: Concept Of Parts Life

    Max. life value Normal *5 Long (Suspend) *5 Normal *5 Long (Suspend) *5 Y,M,C 5,005 M 7,508 M 5,116 M 7,674 M bizhub C353 5,674 M 8,511 M 5,769 M 8,654 M Y,M,C 8,334 M 12,501 M 8,557 M 12,836 M...

  • Page 64: Conditions For Life Specifications Values

    864 mm 5 counts 3.3.2 Conditions for life specifications values Item Description Monochrome : Making 4 copies per job bizhub C353 Color : Making 4 copies per job Monochrome : Making 3 copies per job Job type bizhub C253 Color...

  • Page 65: Maintenance Procedure (Periodical Check Parts)

    3. Periodical check Field Service Ver. 4.0 Jun. 2008 Maintenance procedure (periodical check parts) NOTE • The alcohol described in the cleaning procedure of maintenance represents the isopropyl alcohol. 3.4.1 Cleaning of the electrostatic charger wire A. Periodically cleaning parts/cycle •...

  • Page 66: Cleaning Of The Area Around The Waste Toner Collecting Port

    Field Service Ver. 4.0 Jun. 2008 3. Periodical check 3.4.3 Cleaning of the area around the waste toner collecting port A. Periodically cleaning parts/cycle • Area around the waste toner collecting port: Every 60,000 prints (upon each call) B. Procedure 1.

  • Page 67: Replacing The Tray 1 Feed Roller/Tray 1 Pick-Up Roller

    3. Periodical check Field Service Ver. 4.0 Jun. 2008 3.4.5 Replacing the tray 1 feed roller/tray 1 pick-up roller A. Periodically replacing parts/cycle • Tray 1 feed roller: Every 300,000 prints • Tray 1 pick-up roller: Every 300,000 prints B. Procedure 1.
  • Page 68 Field Service Ver. 4.0 Jun. 2008 3. Periodical check 6. Remove two screws [1], and remove the tray 1 separation roller assy [2]. A02EF2C007DA 7. Remove four screws [1], and remove the tray 1 feed roller cover [2]. A02EF2C008DA 8. Remove two C-clips [1] and two bearings [2], and remove the tray 1 pick-up roller assy [3].
  • Page 69 3. Periodical check Field Service Ver. 4.0 Jun. 2008 9. Remove the C-clip [1], and remove the tray 1 pick-up roller [2]. A02EF2C010DA 10. Remove the C-clip [1] and the bear- ing [2]. Slide the tray 1 feed roller assy [3]. A02EF2C011DA 11.

  • Page 70: Replacing The Tray 1 Separation Roller Assy

    Field Service Ver. 4.0 Jun. 2008 3. Periodical check 3.4.6 Replacing the tray 1 separation roller assy A. Periodically replacing parts/cycle • Tray 1 separation roller assy: Every 300,000 prints B. Procedure 1. Slide out the tray 1. 2. Remove the manual bypass tray unit. See P.102 3.

  • Page 71: Replacing The Tray 2 Feed Roller/Tray 2 Pick-Up Roller

    3. Periodical check Field Service Ver. 4.0 Jun. 2008 3.4.7 Replacing the tray 2 feed roller/tray 2 pick-up roller A. Periodically replacing parts/cycle • Tray 2 feed roller: Every 300,000 prints • Tray 2 pick-up roller: Every 300,000 prints B. Procedure 1.
  • Page 72 Field Service Ver. 4.0 Jun. 2008 3. Periodical check 7. Remove four screws [1], and remove the tray 2 paper feed cover [2]. A02EF2C018DA 8. Remove two C-clips [1] and two bearings [2], and remove the tray 2 pick-up roller assy [3]. A02EF2C019DA 9.
  • Page 73 3. Periodical check Field Service Ver. 4.0 Jun. 2008 10. Remove two C-clips [1] and two bearings [2]. Slide the tray 2 feed roller [3] in the direction of the arrow. A02EF2C020DA 11. Remove the C-clip [1], and remove the tray 2 feed roller [2]. A02EF2C021DA 12.

  • Page 74: Replacing The Tray 2 Separation Roller Assy

    Field Service Ver. 4.0 Jun. 2008 3. Periodical check 3.4.8 Replacing the tray 2 separation roller assy A. Periodically replacing parts/cycle • Tray 2 separation roller assy: Every 300,000 prints B. Procedure 1. Slide out the tray 2. 2. Open the vertical transport door. 3.

  • Page 75: Replacing The Manual Bypass Tray Feed Roller

    3. Periodical check Field Service Ver. 4.0 Jun. 2008 3.4.9 Replacing the manual bypass tray feed roller A. Periodically replacing parts/cycle • Manual bypass tray feed roller: Every 200,000 prints B. Procedure 1. Remove the manual bypass tray unit. See P.102 2.
  • Page 76 Field Service Ver. 4.0 Jun. 2008 3. Periodical check 6. Remove the C-clip [1] and the bear- ing [2]. A02EF2C217DA 7. Remove two C-clips [1] and the bear- ing [2], and remove the manual bypass tray feed roller [3]. A02EF2C218DA 8.

  • Page 77: Replacing The Manual Bypass Tray Separation Roller Assy

    3. Periodical check Field Service Ver. 4.0 Jun. 2008 3.4.10 Replacing the manual bypass tray separation roller assy A. Periodically replacing parts/cycle • Manual bypass tray separation roller assy: Every 200,000 prints B. Procedure 1. Remove the manual bypass tray unit. See P.102 2.

  • Page 78: Replacing The Waste Toner Box

    Field Service Ver. 4.0 Jun. 2008 3. Periodical check 5. Snap off two C-clips [1], and remove the spring [2] and the guide plate [3]. Remove the manual bypass tray separation roller assy [4]. A02EF2C535DA 6. To reinstall, reverse the order of removal. 3.4.11 Replacing the waste toner box A.

  • Page 79: Replacing The Transfer Roller Unit

    3. Periodical check Field Service Ver. 4.0 Jun. 2008 C. Reinstall procedure 1. Remove a new waste toner box from its packaging and remove the pack- ing material. 2. Place the waste toner box [1] in posi- tion. A02EF2C506DA 3. Close the front door. 3.4.12 Replacing the transfer roller unit A.

  • Page 80: Replacing The Imaging Unit

    3. Periodical check 3.4.13 Replacing the imaging unit A. Periodically replacing parts/cycle • Imaging unit Y,M,C : Every 90,000 prints (bizhub C353) : Every 75,000 prints (bizhub C253) : Every 55,000 prints (bizhub C203) • Imaging unit K : Every 120,000 prints (bizhub C353)
  • Page 81 3. Periodical check Field Service Ver. 4.0 Jun. 2008 C. Reinstall procedure 1. Remove the imaging unit [1] from its packaging. A02EF2C508DA 2. Peel off the tapes, and then remove the packing materials [1]. A02EF2C509DA 3. Remove the imaging unit [2] from the black protective bag [1].
  • Page 82 Field Service Ver. 4.0 Jun. 2008 3. Periodical check 4. Tilt the imaging unit [1] to the left and shake it a little left to right twice. Then, tilt the imaging unit to the right and shake it a little right to left twice. A02EF2C511DA 5.
  • Page 83 3. Periodical check Field Service Ver. 4.0 Jun. 2008 7. Align the ▲ mark on the imaging unit with the ▼ mark on the main body. Install the imaging unit [1] into the main body. A02EF2C514DA 8. To remove the protective sheet [1] which guards against PC drum dam- age, slowly pull its tab.

  • Page 84: Replacing The Ozone Filter

    A02EF2C026DA 3.4.15 Replacing the toner cartridge A. Periodically replacing parts/cycle • Toner cartridge Y,M,C : Every 20,000 prints (bizhub C353) : Every 19,000 prints (bizhub C253/C203) • Toner cartridge K : Every 26,000 prints (bizhub C353) : Every 24,500 prints (bizhub C253/C203) B.
  • Page 85 3. Periodical check Field Service Ver. 4.0 Jun. 2008 C. Reinstall procedure 1. Remove the new toner cartridge [1] from its packaging, and then shake the cartridge up and down 5 to 10 times. A02EF2C518DA 2. Align the toner cartridge [1] with the slots in the machine, and then insert the cartridge until the locking tab locks into place.

  • Page 86: Replacing The Transfer Belt Unit

    Field Service Ver. 4.0 Jun. 2008 3. Periodical check 3.4.16 Replacing the transfer belt unit A. Periodically replacing parts/cycle • Transfer belt unit: Every 150,000 prints NOTE • Before replacement operations of the transfer belt unit, make sure to turn OFF the main power switch and the sub power switch.
  • Page 87 3. Periodical check Field Service Ver. 4.0 Jun. 2008 C. Reinstall procedure 1. Insert the transfer belt unit [1]. NOTE • Insert the transfer belt unit with care not to allow its docking gear to be damaged by hitting it against the rail or associated part.

  • Page 88: Cleaning Of The Image Transfer Entrance Guide

    Field Service Ver. 4.0 Jun. 2008 3. Periodical check 3.4.17 Cleaning of the image transfer entrance guide A. Periodically cleaning parts/cycle • Image transfer entrance guide: When the transfer belt unit is replaced (every 150,000 print) B. Procedure 1. Remove the transfer belt unit. See P.41 2.

  • Page 89: Replacing The Fusing Unit

    3. Periodical check Field Service Ver. 4.0 Jun. 2008 3.4.19 Replacing the fusing unit CAUTION • The temperature gets high in the vicinity of the fusing unit. You may get burned when you come into contact with the area. Before replacement operations, make sure that more than 20 minutes have elapsed since the main and sub power switches were turned off.
  • Page 90 Field Service Ver. 4.0 Jun. 2008 3. Periodical check 6. Remove two screws [1], and remove the fusing unit [2]. NOTE • When removing the fusing unit, hold the parts shown on the picture on the left so that it would not fall. A02EF2C038DA...

  • Page 91: Service Tool

    4. Service tool Field Service Ver. 4.0 Jun. 2008 Service tool Service material list Name Shape Material No. Remarks Cleaning pad 000V-18-1 10pcs/1pack A02EF2C526DA ⎯ Isopropyl alcohol A00KF2C506DA Molykote EM-50L grease 4478 7801 ## Used with FS-519 A00KF2C507DA CE tool list Tool name Shape Quantity...

  • Page 92: Copy Materials

    *1: Inquire of KMBT about the part number of compact flash in which the firmware data is written. Copy materials 4.3.1 Imaging unit single parts (IU) Replacing period Parts name bizhub C353 bizhub C253 bizhub C203 Imaging unit K 120,000 prints 100,000 prints 70,000 prints...

  • Page 93: Firmware Upgrade

    Internet ISW. Notes about firmware rewrite 5.2.1 Types of firmware • Two types of firmware are released for bizhub C353/C253/C203. They are a mainte- nance release version and an enhanced version. Maintenance release version : Addresses remaining problems Function enhanced version...
  • Page 94 Field Service Ver. 4.0 Jun. 2008 5. Firmware upgrade B. Downgrade from the function enhancement 3 to the function enhancement 2 NOTE • Before downgrading the firmware, the following steps are required to be taken. (1) Down Ver. 1. Call the Service Mode to the screen. 2.

  • Page 95: Preparations For Firmware Rewriting By Windows Command Prompt

    5. Firmware upgrade Field Service Ver. 4.0 Jun. 2008 Preparations for firmware rewriting by Windows Command Prompt 5.3.1 Service environment • OS: Windows 2000/XP • Drive which enables writing/reading of compact flash • Compact flash (service tool) 5.3.2 Writing into the compact flash 1.
  • Page 96 • For ## within the above mkcf command, type two characters that correspond to the machine model on which firmware upgrading is made. Take a look at the following list to find right characters for a correct command. Model and command list bizhub C353 bizhub C253 bizhub C203 A02EF2E531DA...
  • Page 97 5. Firmware upgrade Field Service Ver. 4.0 Jun. 2008 8. Upon completion of writing, CHECKSUM is executed. If CHECKSUM value is precisely matched, “VERIFY OK” appears. 4038F2E565DB 9. Remove the compact flash from PC. NOTE • When removing the compact flash, be sure to check if data is written as normal and then remove it according to the precise removing method.

  • Page 98: Preparations For Firmware Rewriting By Firmware Imaging Toolkit 2006

    • This software is designed as the tool to write firmware data of MFP/printer released by KMBT into the compact flash card. 5.4.1 Correspond model • Correspond models of the software is as follows. • bizhub C650/C550/C451/C450/C353/C352/C351/C350/C300/C253/C250/C203 Color machine • bizhub C450P/C353P/C352P/C250P • bizhub 350/250/200 B/W machine •...

  • Page 99: Installation Of Software

    5. Firmware upgrade Field Service Ver. 4.0 Jun. 2008 5.4.4 Installation of software • Follow the procedures shown below to install the software. NOTE • Install the software to the PC with the administration authentication. • When any anti-virus program is activated, quite the program before the installa- tion.
  • Page 100 Field Service Ver. 4.0 Jun. 2008 5. Firmware upgrade 3. After checking the contents of license agreement, select [I accept the terms in the license agreement] and click [Next >]. 9J06F2E701DA 4. Select the installed destination folder of Firmware Imaging Toolkit 2006, and click [Next>].

  • Page 101: Update Of Software

    5. Firmware upgrade Field Service Ver. 4.0 Jun. 2008 5. Click [Install] to start installation. 6. Click [Finish] to complete the installation. 9J06F2E703DA 7. Shortcut file will be created inside Windows Start menu ([Program] → [KONICA MINOLTA] → [Firmware Imaging Toolkit 2006]). 9J06F2E708DA 5.4.5 Update of software...

  • Page 102: Screen

    Field Service Ver. 4.0 Jun. 2008 5. Firmware upgrade 5.4.6 Screen A. Main window • The main window will be displayed after activating the software. • Main window consists of 2 patterns: Basic mode, Advanced mode When the advanced mode is selected 9J06F2E704DA About •...
  • Page 103 5. Firmware upgrade Field Service Ver. 4.0 Jun. 2008 B. Settings dialog • It will be displayed by clicking [Settings] at main window. • Other settings will be enabled by selecting the check box of [Enabled Advanced Fea- tures]. 9J06F2E705DA Enable Advanced •...

  • Page 104: Details Of Each Function

    Although the compact flash with larger capacity than the original one can be used, it is not covered under warranty. • C350 firmware requires the compact flash over 64 MB. • Firmware of C650/C550/C451/C450/C450P/C353/C352/C352P/C351/C300/C253/ C250/C250P/C203 requires the compact flash over 128 MB. (2) Compare Firmware with a card •...
  • Page 105 The information to be displayed is according to the type of written FW data. • For the series of Di3510/200/250/350 series, MSC version is displayed. • For the series of C650/C550/C451/C450/C450P/C353/C353P/C352/C352P/C351/C350/ C300/C253/C250/C250P/C203, check sums of each firmware data is displayed.

  • Page 106: How To Write Firmware Data

    Field Service Ver. 4.0 Jun. 2008 5. Firmware upgrade 5.4.8 How to write firmware data A. In the case of C650/C550/C451/C450/C450P/C353/C353P/C352/C352P/C351/C350/ C300/C253/C250/C250P/C203 series 1. Put the firmware data in the optional directory. (C:\bizhub in the below figure) 9J06F2E710DA NOTE • The file name of firmware data consists of the “Release Date_Version_CHECKSUM-****.exe.”...
  • Page 107 5. Firmware upgrade Field Service Ver. 4.0 Jun. 2008 3. Mount the compact flash on the PC, and check the drive name, which was recognized in the Windows. (F-drive in the following figure) 9J06F2E712DA 4. Start Firmware Imaging Toolkit 2006. NOTE •...
  • Page 108 Field Service Ver. 4.0 Jun. 2008 5. Firmware upgrade 6. Click [Browse]. 9J06F2E707DA 7. Select the file type [C353/C253/C203 Indexed Firmware]. 8. Move to the folder decompressed at step 2, confirm that only “###_cf.tar.gz” (### is for model name) is displayed, and select. NOTE •...
  • Page 109 5. Firmware upgrade Field Service Ver. 4.0 Jun. 2008 10. Select the drive that the compact flash is inserted, which is confirmed at step 3. NOTE • The drives other than the compact flash that is recognized as “Removable Disk” can be selected for the writing destination.
  • Page 110 Field Service Ver. 4.0 Jun. 2008 5. Firmware upgrade 13. Click [Yes], and data writing starts. NOTE • Writing a card is a resource intensive operation for your computer - do not attempt to multitask (use the computer for anything else) during the writing procedure. 14.

  • Page 111: Firmware Rewriting By Compact Flash

    5. Firmware upgrade Field Service Ver. 4.0 Jun. 2008 Firmware rewriting by compact flash • The firmware is updated using the compact flash. 5.5.1 Updating method NOTE • NEVER remove or insert the compact flash card with the machine power turned 1.
  • Page 112 Field Service Ver. 4.0 Jun. 2008 5. Firmware upgrade 7. Select the particular type of F/W to be updated. (Select [YES].) A02EF2C522DA F/W to be updated Appropriate board MFP CONTROLLER MFP board (MFPB) SCANNER Image processing board (IPB) PRINTER Printer control board (PRCB) FAX BOARD CONTROLLER1 Fax board (Main) *1 FAX BOARD CONTROLLER2 Fax board (Sub) *2 ADF (DF-M)

  • Page 113: Action When Data Transfer Fails

    5. Firmware upgrade Field Service Ver. 4.0 Jun. 2008 NOTE • When turning the main power switch ON for the first time after the firmware is updated, data may sometimes be internally updated. In that case, the following message will be displayed. Never turn the main power switch OFF until either the serial number input screen or the trouble code screen is displayed.

  • Page 114: Updating The Firmware With The Internet Isw

    Field Service Ver. 4.0 Jun. 2008 5. Firmware upgrade Updating the firmware with the Internet ISW 5.6.1 Outline • [Internet ISW] is the system which gives the instruction for updating the firmware with the control panel of the main body, so the main body will automatically receive the firmware from the program server over a network for updating.
  • Page 115 5. Firmware upgrade Field Service Ver. 4.0 Jun. 2008 3. Touch [ON], and touch [END]. NOTE • Settings such as server setting, etc. will be available by selecting “ON” on this set- ting. • When the following setting is set to “ON”, “ON” cannot be selected on this setting. [Administrator Setting] →...
  • Page 116 Field Service Ver. 4.0 Jun. 2008 5. Firmware upgrade C. Forwarding access setting • To make the access setting for the program server which stores the firmware data. 1. Select [Internet ISW] which is available from [Service Mode]. 2. Touch [Forwarding Access Setting]. A00JF2E584DA 3.

  • Page 117: Firmware Rewriting

    5. Firmware upgrade Field Service Ver. 4.0 Jun. 2008 5.6.4 Firmware rewriting NOTE • When performing the Internet ISW, ask the administrator for permission before- hand. • DO NOT turn OFF the main/sub power switch while downloading. A. Conducting rewriting on the control panel. 1.
  • Page 118 Field Service Ver. 4.0 Jun. 2008 5. Firmware upgrade C. Completed or failed (1) Firmware updated normally 1. When the firmware is normally updated, restart the main body in auto or manual mode to display the outcome, and touch [OK] to return to the main screen. (2) Failing to update the firmware due to the network trouble 1.

  • Page 119: Error Code List For The Internet Isw

    5. Firmware upgrade Field Service Ver. 4.0 Jun. 2008 D. Confirming the firmware version 1. Call the Service Mode to the screen. 2. Select the [Firmware Version]. 3. Check if the firmware version is updated. 5.6.5 Error code list for the Internet ISW •...
  • Page 120 Field Service Ver. 4.0 Jun. 2008 5. Firmware upgrade Error code Description Countermeasure Control panel • Check the User’s network environment. (LAN cable’s connection) • Check the status of the following set- Error concerning the network ting. 0x00111000 [Service Mode] → [Internet ISW] → •...
  • Page 121 5. Firmware upgrade Field Service Ver. 4.0 Jun. 2008 Error code Description Countermeasure Control panel • It failed to prohibit the job. (It failed to • Check if the following setting is set to lock the operation.) → It failed to lock the job because the “ON”.

  • Page 122: Other

    Field Service Ver. 4.0 Jun. 2008 6. Other Other Disassembly/adjustment prohibited items A. Paint-locked screws NOTE • To prevent loose screws, a screw lock in blue or green series color is applied to the screws. • The screw lock is applied to the screws that may get loose due to the vibrations and loads created by the use of machine or due to the vibrations created during transportation.

  • Page 123: Disassembly/Assembly/Cleaning List (Other Parts)

    6. Other Field Service Ver. 4.0 Jun. 2008 Disassembly/assembly/cleaning list (other parts) 6.2.1 Disassembly/assembly parts list Section Part name Ref. page Front door P.81 Upper front cover/1 P.82 Upper front cover/2 P.83 Right front cover/1 P.83 Right front cover/2 P.84 Left cover P.85 Rear left cover/1...
  • Page 124 Field Service Ver. 4.0 Jun. 2008 6. Other Section Part name Ref. page PH unit P.97 Manual bypass tray unit P.102 CCD unit P.103 Original glass moving unit P.105 Glass step sheet P.108 Scanner assy P.110 Units Hard disk drive P.112 Main drive unit P.112...

  • Page 125: Cleaning Parts List

    6. Other Field Service Ver. 4.0 Jun. 2008 Section Part name Ref. page Paper feed tray 1 paper feed clutch (CL1) P.161 Paper feed tray 2 vertical transport clutch (CL3) P.162 Paper feed tray 2 paper feed clutch (CL2) P.163 Clutches Manual paper feed clutch (CL4) P.163...

  • Page 126: Disassembly/Assembly Procedure

    Field Service Ver. 4.0 Jun. 2008 6. Other Disassembly/assembly procedure 6.3.1 Front door 1. Open the front door. 2. Remove two screws [1] and two sup- pression plates [2]. A02EF2C041DA 3. Remove the PH window cleaning jig [1]. A02EF2C042DA...

  • Page 127: Upper Front Cover/1

    6. Other Field Service Ver. 4.0 Jun. 2008 4. Slide two pins [1] in the direction of the arrow and remove it. 5. Remove the front door [2]. A02EF2C043DA 6.3.2 Upper front cover/1 1. Open the front door. 2. Remove the IR left cover. See P.88 3.

  • Page 128: Upper Front Cover/2

    Field Service Ver. 4.0 Jun. 2008 6. Other 6.3.3 Upper front cover/2 1. Open the right door. 2. Remove the upper front cover/1. See P.82 3. Remove the harness cover [1]. 4. Remove two screws [2], and remove the upper front cover/2 [3]. A02EF2C045DA 6.3.4 Right front cover/1...

  • Page 129: Right Front Cover/2

    6. Other Field Service Ver. 4.0 Jun. 2008 6.3.5 Right front cover/2 1. Slide out the tray 1 and tray 2. 2. Remove the right front cover/1. See P.83 3. Remove two screws [1], and remove the right front cover/2 [2]. NOTE •...

  • Page 130: Left Cover

    Field Service Ver. 4.0 Jun. 2008 6. Other 6. Remove two empty display lenses [1]. A02EF2C049DA 6.3.6 Left cover 1. Open the front door. 2. If the optional finisher FS-519 is mounted, remove it. See P.28 of the FS-519/PK-515/OT- 602 service manual. NOTE •...

  • Page 131: Rear Left Cover/1

    6. Other Field Service Ver. 4.0 Jun. 2008 6.3.7 Rear left cover/1 1. Open the front door. 2. Remove the ozone filter. See P.39 3. Remove the left cover. See P.85 4. Remove four screws [1], and remove the rear left cover/1 [2]. A02EF2C051DA 6.3.8 Rear left cover/2...

  • Page 132: Exit Cover

    Field Service Ver. 4.0 Jun. 2008 6. Other 6.3.9 Exit cover 1. Remove the screw [1], unhook two [1] [3] tabs [2], and remove the paper exit cover [3]. A02EF2C173DA 6.3.10 Paper exit rear cover 1. Remove the rear left cover/2. See P.86 2.

  • Page 133: Ir Rear Cover, Ir Right Cover, Ir Upper Rear Cover/1, Ir Upper Rear Cover/2, Ir Upper Rear Cover/3

    6. Other Field Service Ver. 4.0 Jun. 2008 6.3.11 IR rear cover, IR right cover, IR upper rear cover/1, IR upper rear cover/2, IR upper rear cover/3 [10] [11] A02EF2C054DA 1. Remove four screws [1], and remove the IR rear cover [2]. 2.

  • Page 134: Original Glass

    Field Service Ver. 4.0 Jun. 2008 6. Other 6.3.13 IR front cover 1. Remove the IR left cover. See P.88 2. Remove the IR right cover. See P.88 3. Remove the IR upper front cover. See P.88 4. Remove four screws [1], and remove the IR front cover [2].

  • Page 135: Rear Right Cover/1, Rear Right Cover/2, Rear Right Cover/3

    6. Other Field Service Ver. 4.0 Jun. 2008 3. Remove the original glass [1]. A02EF2C059DA 6.3.15 Rear right cover/1, rear right cover/2, rear right cover/3 A02EF2C060DA 1. Open the right door. 2. Remove two screws [1], and remove the rear right cover/1 [2]. 3.

  • Page 136: Manual Bypass Tray Front Cover, Manual Bypass Tray Rear Cover

    Field Service Ver. 4.0 Jun. 2008 6. Other 6.3.16 Manual bypass tray front cover, manual bypass tray rear cover 1. Open the vertical transport door. 2. Remove the rear right cover/3. See P.90 3. Remove two screws [1], and remove the manual bypass tray front cover [2] and the manual bypass tray rear cover [3].

  • Page 137: Lower Rear Cover/1, Lower Rear Cover/2

    6. Other Field Service Ver. 4.0 Jun. 2008 6.3.18 Lower rear cover/1, lower rear cover/2 1. Remove seven screws [1], and remove the lower rear cover/1 [2] and the lower rear cover/2 [3]. A02EF2C063DA 6.3.19 Vertical transport door 1. Open the vertical transport door. 2.

  • Page 138: Exit Tray

    Field Service Ver. 4.0 Jun. 2008 6. Other 4. Remove two screws [1], and discon- nect the connector [2]. A02EF2C066DA 5. Remove six screws [1], and remove the control panel assy [2]. A02EF2C067DA 6.3.21 Exit tray 1. Open the front door. 2.

  • Page 139: Tray 1

    6. Other Field Service Ver. 4.0 Jun. 2008 6.3.22 Tray 1 1. Slide out the tray 1. 2. Remove the screw [1] and metal plate [2], and remove the tray 1 [3]. A02EF2C069DA 6.3.23 Tray 2 1. Slide out the tray 1 and tray 2. 2.

  • Page 140: Front Cover

    Field Service Ver. 4.0 Jun. 2008 6. Other 6.3.24 Front cover 1. Slide out the tray 1. 2. Remove the front door. See P.81 3. Remove the left cover. See P.85 4. Remove the toner cartridges (C, M, Y, K). See P.39 5.
  • Page 141 6. Other Field Service Ver. 4.0 Jun. 2008 10. Disconnect two connectors [1]. A02EF2C071DA 11. Remove five screws [1]. A02EF2C072DA 12. Unhook six tabs [1], and disconnect the connector [2] from the front cover. 13. Remove the front cover [3]. A02EF2C073DA...

  • Page 142: Ph Unit

    Field Service Ver. 4.0 Jun. 2008 6. Other 6.3.25 PH unit CAUTION • Do not replace the printer head unit while the power is ON. Laser beam generated during the above mentioned activity may cause blindness. • Do not disassemble or adjust the printer head unit. Laser beam generated during the above mentioned activity may cause blindness.
  • Page 143 6. Other Field Service Ver. 4.0 Jun. 2008 5. Unhook the tab [1], and remove the gear [2] of the PH unit. NOTE • This step is not needed when removing PH unit (Black) that does not have a gear. A02EF2C076DA 6.
  • Page 144 Field Service Ver. 4.0 Jun. 2008 6. Other Remove the boss [1] at the rear side of the PH unit from the locating hole [2]. NOTE • Since the back of the PH unit is pushed to the right with the two plate springs [3], remove it by tilting the backside of the PH unit to the left as shown in the left illustration.
  • Page 145 6. Other Field Service Ver. 4.0 Jun. 2008 2. Push the PH unit [1] along the right side line of PH unit installation plate all the way and fit it into the plate spring [2]. 3. Make sure that the two bosses [3] at front and rear side of the PH unit fit in two locating holes [4].
  • Page 146 Field Service Ver. 4.0 Jun. 2008 6. Other 5. Reinstall the gear [1]. NOTE • Make sure that the gear claw is fit 6. Connect the connector and the flat cable. NOTE • Make sure the harness is installed along with the harness guide. 7.

  • Page 147: Manual Bypass Tray Unit

    6. Other Field Service Ver. 4.0 Jun. 2008 6.3.26 Manual bypass tray unit 1. Open the vertical transport door. 2. Remove the rear cover/3. See P.91 3. Remove the manual bypass tray front cover and the manual bypass tray rear cover. See P.91 4.

  • Page 148: Ccd Unit

    Field Service Ver. 4.0 Jun. 2008 6. Other 6.3.27 CCD unit A. Removal procedure 1. Remove the original glass. See P.89 2. Remove nine screws [1], and remove the image processing board protec- tive shield [2]. A00JF2C156DA 3. Remove the flat cable [1]. 4.
  • Page 149 6. Other Field Service Ver. 4.0 Jun. 2008 B. Reinstall procedure 1. Set the CCD unit to the mounting position at the center of the scale, and fix it with four screws. A00JF2C115DA 2. Reinstall the original glass. 3. Turn ON the main power switch and sub power switch. 4.

  • Page 150: Original Glass Moving Unit

    Field Service Ver. 4.0 Jun. 2008 6. Other 6.3.28 Original glass moving unit A. Removal procedure 1. Remove the IR left cover. See P.88 2. Remove the IR right cover. See P.88 3. Remove the IR upper front cover. See P.88 4.
  • Page 151 6. Other Field Service Ver. 4.0 Jun. 2008 10. Remove the C-ring [1] and the collar [2] one each, and remove the belts [3] of both sides of the original glass mounting unit out of the gear [4]. NOTE • Be sure the direction of the collar [2] to be as shown in the left illus- tration when mounting it.
  • Page 152 Field Service Ver. 4.0 Jun. 2008 6. Other 12. Remove four screws [1], and remove the original glass moving unit [2]. NOTE • Use care not to lose the spacer [3] mounted on each screw. • Write down the type and numbers of the spacer [3].

  • Page 153: Glass Step Sheet

    6. Other Field Service Ver. 4.0 Jun. 2008 4. Tighten four screws [1] fully. A00JF2C421DA 5. Follow the removing procedures in the opposite steps. 6. Perform the following setting. [Service Mode] → [ADF] → [Read Pos Adj] See P.32 of the DF-611 service manual. 6.3.29 Glass step sheet A.
  • Page 154 Field Service Ver. 4.0 Jun. 2008 6. Other B. Reinstall procedure 1. Mount the glass step sheet [1] to the original glass moving unit [2]. NOTE • Set the sheet [3] under the cover of the original glass moving unit [4]. •...

  • Page 155: Scanner Assy

    6. Other Field Service Ver. 4.0 Jun. 2008 6.3.30 Scanner assy A. Removal procedure 1. Remove the original glass. See P.89 2. Remove two screws [1], and remove the scanner assy [2]. A00JF2C422DA 3. Remove two screws [1], and remove the exposure lamp [2] from the scan- ner assy.
  • Page 156 Field Service Ver. 4.0 Jun. 2008 6. Other 2. Tighten the scanner assy [2] with the two screws [1] temporarily. A00JF2C422DA 3. Move the scanner assy [1] and the mirror unit to the end of the right. A00JF2C424DA 4. Slide the mirror unit until it hits the end of the IR right frame.

  • Page 157: Hard Disk Drive (Hdd)

    6. Other Field Service Ver. 4.0 Jun. 2008 6.3.31 Hard disk drive (HDD) 1. Remove the hard disk drive unit. See the steps 1 to 8 of printer control board removing procedure. See P.135 2. Disconnect the connector [1]. 3. Remove four screws [2], and remove the hard disk drive [3].
  • Page 158 Field Service Ver. 4.0 Jun. 2008 6. Other 6. Disconnect two connectors [1], and remove the harness from two wire saddles [2]. A02EF2C087DA 7. Disconnect the connector [1], and remove the harness from the har- ness guide [2]. 8. Remove two screws [3], and remove the harness guide [2].

  • Page 159: Transport Drive Unit

    6. Other Field Service Ver. 4.0 Jun. 2008 10. Remove the E-ring [1], and remove the gear [2]. A02EF2C090DA 11. Disconnect the connector [1], and remove the harness from five wire saddles [2]. 12. Remove the main drive unit. A02EF2C091DA 6.3.33 Transport drive unit 1.
  • Page 160 Field Service Ver. 4.0 Jun. 2008 6. Other 5. Close the right door. 6. Remove eight screws [1], and remove two reinforcement plates [2] of the right door. A02EF2C093DA 7. Remove the shoulder screw [1], the spring [2] and the collar [3]. A02EF2C094DA 8.
  • Page 161 6. Other Field Service Ver. 4.0 Jun. 2008 9. Remove the harness from seven wire saddles [1]. 10. Disconnect two connectors [2], and remove the harness from the edge cover [3]. A02EF2C097DA 11. Remove seven screws [1], and remove the rear handle assy [2]. A02EF2C098DA 12.
  • Page 162 Field Service Ver. 4.0 Jun. 2008 6. Other 13. Remove each six tabs [1] and two hooks [3]. 14. Remove two wire guides [2]. A02EF2C100DA 15. Remove the wire guide [1] and eight screws [3], and disconnect the con- nector [2]. 16.

  • Page 163: Fusing Drive Unit

    6. Other Field Service Ver. 4.0 Jun. 2008 6.3.34 Fusing drive unit 1. Remove the transfer belt unit. See P.41 2. Remove the fusing unit. See P.44 3. Remove the fusing motor. See P.154 4. Remove the harness from two har- ness guides [1].
  • Page 164 Field Service Ver. 4.0 Jun. 2008 6. Other 9. Remove four screws [1], and remove the fusing rear guide [2] and the shaft cover [3]. A02EF2C105DA 10. Remove the spring [1] from the pro- trusion [2]. A02EF2C106DA 11. Unhook the tab [1]. Pull the fusing drive unit [2] to the front and remove it.

  • Page 165: Hopper Drive Unit (C/K, Y/M)

    6. Other Field Service Ver. 4.0 Jun. 2008 6.3.35 Hopper drive unit (C/K, Y/M) A. Hopper drive unit (C/K) 1. Remove the main drive unit. See P.112 2. Disconnect the connector [1]. 3. Remove four screws [2], and remove the hopper drive unit (C/K) [3]. A02EF2C108DA B.

  • Page 166: Right Door Assy

    Field Service Ver. 4.0 Jun. 2008 6. Other 6.3.36 Right door assy 1. Remove the lower rear cover/1 and the lower rear cover/2. See P.92 2. Remove the manual bypass tray unit. See P.102 3. Remove the high voltage unit. See P.141 4.
  • Page 167 6. Other Field Service Ver. 4.0 Jun. 2008 10. Open the right door, and remove the collar [1], the spring [2] and the shoulder screw [3]. A02EF2C114DA 11. Remove the harness from six wire saddles [1] and the edge cover [2]. A02EF2C115DA 12.
  • Page 168 Field Service Ver. 4.0 Jun. 2008 6. Other 14. Disconnect the connector [2], remove seven screws [1], and remove the rear handle assy [3]. A02EF2C117DA 15. Disconnect two connectors [2], and remove the harness from the edge cover [1]. A02EF2C118DA 16.

  • Page 169: Ir Assy

    6. Other Field Service Ver. 4.0 Jun. 2008 17. Remove the screw [1], and remove two shafts [2]. 18. Remove the right door assy [3]. A02EF2C120DA 6.3.37 IR Assy 1. Remove the IR left cover. See P.88 2. Remove the IR right cover. See P.88 3.
  • Page 170 Field Service Ver. 4.0 Jun. 2008 6. Other 9. Remove the screw [1], and remove the ground terminal [2]. A02EF2C122DA 10. Remove the harness from seven wire saddles [1]. A02EF2C123DA 11. Loosen two screws [1] and remove the connector [2]. 12.

  • Page 171: Scanner Relay Board (Reyb/Scan)

    6. Other Field Service Ver. 4.0 Jun. 2008 13. Remove ten screws [1], and remove IR assy. NOTE • The two right rear screws are hid- den under the seals. Peel off the stickers first and remove the screws. A02EF2C125DA 6.3.38 Scanner relay board (REYB/SCAN) 1.

  • Page 172: Original Glass Position Control Board (Ogpcb)

    Field Service Ver. 4.0 Jun. 2008 6. Other 3. Disconnect five connectors [1] and the flat cable [2]. A00JF2C149DA 4. Remove four screws [1], and remove the scanner relay board [2]. A00JF2C150DA 6.3.39 Original glass position control board (OGPCB) 1. Remove the IR upper rear cover/1 and the IR upper rear cover/2. See P.88 2.

  • Page 173: Inverter Board (Invb)

    6. Other Field Service Ver. 4.0 Jun. 2008 3. Remove two screws [1], and remove the original glass position control board [2]. A00JF2C152DA 6.3.40 Inverter board (INVB) 1. Remove the IR upper rear cover/1 and the IR upper rear cover/2. See P.88 2.

  • Page 174: Image Processing Board (Ipb)

    Field Service Ver. 4.0 Jun. 2008 6. Other 4. Remove four screws [1], and the inverter board assy [2]. A00JF2C154DA 5. Remove four screws [1], and remove the inverter board [2]. A00JF2C155DA 6.3.41 Image processing board (IPB) 1. Remove the original glass. See P.89 2.
  • Page 175 6. Other Field Service Ver. 4.0 Jun. 2008 3. Remove all the connectors and flat cables on the image processing board [1]. A00JF2C157DA 4. Loosen two screws [1], disconnect the IR cable connector [2]. A00JF2C158DA 5. Remove the two bolts [1]. A00JF2C579DA...

  • Page 176: Ph Relay Board (Reyb/Ph)

    Field Service Ver. 4.0 Jun. 2008 6. Other 6. Remove six screws [1], and remove the image processing board [2]. NOTE • When the image processing board is replaced, make sure to update the firmware. A00JF2C159DA 6.3.42 PH relay board (REYB/PH) 1.
  • Page 177 6. Other Field Service Ver. 4.0 Jun. 2008 6. Remove two screws [1] each, and remove the imaging unit roll assy [2] of each color. A02EF2C129DA 7. Remove all the connectors and the flat cables on the PH relay board. A02EF2C130DA 8.

  • Page 178: Dc Power Supply (Dcpu)

    Field Service Ver. 4.0 Jun. 2008 6. Other 9. Remove two screws [1] and six tabs [2], and remove the PH relay board [3]. A02EF2C132DA 6.3.43 DC power supply (DCPU) CAUTION • Remove the DC power supply after six minutes or more have passed since the power plug was disconnected.
  • Page 179 6. Other Field Service Ver. 4.0 Jun. 2008 8. Remove the harness from seven wire saddles [1] and two edge covers [2]. A02EF2C135DA 9. Remove all the connectors on the DC power supply [1]. A02EF2C136DA 10. Remove four screws [1], and remove the DC power supply [2].

  • Page 180: Printer Control Board (Prcb)

    Field Service Ver. 4.0 Jun. 2008 6. Other 6.3.44 Printer control board (PRCB) 1. Open the front door. 2. Remove the rear left cover/1 and the rear left cover/2. See P.86 3. Remove the upper rear cover, the rear cover/1 and the rear cover/2. See P.91 4.
  • Page 181 6. Other Field Service Ver. 4.0 Jun. 2008 7. Disconnect the flat cable [1]. 8. Remove the flat cable [1] from three cable holders [2] and get the flat cable out of the way. A02EF2C141DA 9. Disconnect the connector [1], remove two screws [2], and remove the metal plate [3].

  • Page 182: Mfp Board (Mfpb)

    Field Service Ver. 4.0 Jun. 2008 6. Other 11. Remove six screws [1]. Slide the printer control board [2] in the direc- tion of the arrow and remove it. A02EF2C144DA NOTE • When the printer control board is to be replaced, rewriting the firmware to the lat- est one.

  • Page 183: Pwb Box

    6. Other Field Service Ver. 4.0 Jun. 2008 7. Remove five screws [1] and six bolts [2], and remove the metal plate [3]. A02EF2C146DA 8. Remove twelve screws [1] of the MFP board. 9. Slide the MFP board [2] in the direc- tion of the arrow, disconnect the con- nector [3], and remove the MFP board.
  • Page 184 Field Service Ver. 4.0 Jun. 2008 6. Other 5. Disconnect the connector [1], and remove the harness from the wire saddle [2]. 6. Remove two screws [3], and remove the MFP board cooling fan motor [4]. A02EF2C149DA 7. Remove the harness from the wire saddle [1], and disconnect the con- nector [2].
  • Page 185 6. Other Field Service Ver. 4.0 Jun. 2008 10. Remove five screws [1], and remove the metal plate [2]. A02EF2C539DA 11. Remove fourteen screws [1]. While raising the PWB box [2] a little, slide it to the left. Then, remove the cool- ing fan motor/2 [3].

  • Page 186: High Voltage Unit (Hv)

    Field Service Ver. 4.0 Jun. 2008 6. Other 6.3.47 High voltage unit (HV) 1. Remove the PWB box See P.138 2. Disconnect seven connectors [1]. A02EF2C154DA 3. Remove five screws [1] and the tab [2], and remove the high voltage unit [3].

  • Page 187: Service Eeprom Board (Sv Erb)

    6. Other Field Service Ver. 4.0 Jun. 2008 6.3.48 Service EEPROM board (SV ERB) 1. Remove the rear cover /1 and the rear cover /2 See P.91 2. Remove the protective shield/1 and the protective shield/2. See the steps 1 to 5 of printer control board removing procedure. See P.135 3.
  • Page 188 Field Service Ver. 4.0 Jun. 2008 6. Other Order Items that require readjustment in the Service mode Ref. page Machine Exhaust Fan Stop Delay P.359 System 2 Unit Change Warning Display P.397 System 1 IU Life Setting P.393 NOTE • After replacing the service EEPROM board, be sure to make the above listed adjustments before the first warm-up is made.

  • Page 189: Sodimm/1, Sodimm/2

    6. Other Field Service Ver. 4.0 Jun. 2008 6.3.49 SODIMM/1, SODIMM/2 1. Remove the protective shield/1 and the protective shield/2. See the steps 1 to 5 of printer control board removing procedure. See P.135 2. Remove the SODIMM/1 [1] and SODIMM/2 [2] on the MFP board.

  • Page 190: Nvram Board (Nrb)

    Field Service Ver. 4.0 Jun. 2008 6. Other 6.3.51 NVRAM board (NRB) 1. Remove the protective shield/1 and the protective shield/2. See the steps 1 to 5 of printer control board removing procedure. See P.135 2. Remove the NVRAM board [2] on the MFP board [1].

  • Page 191: Paper Feed Tray 1 Paper Fd Size Detect Board (Psdtb/1)

    6. Other Field Service Ver. 4.0 Jun. 2008 6.3.53 Paper feed tray 1 paper FD size detect board (PSDTB/1) 1. Remove the tray 1. See P.94 2. Remove the tray 2. See P.94 3. Disconnect the connector [1], and remove the harness from the edge cover [2].

  • Page 192: Paper Feed Tray 2 Paper Fd Size Detect Board (Psdtb/2)

    Field Service Ver. 4.0 Jun. 2008 6. Other 6.3.54 Paper feed tray 2 paper FD size detect board (PSDTB/2) 1. Remove the tray 1. See P.94 2. Remove the tray 2. See P.94 3. Disconnect the connector [1], and remove the harness from the edge cover [2].

  • Page 193: Scanner Motor (M201)

    6. Other Field Service Ver. 4.0 Jun. 2008 6.3.55 Scanner motor (M201) A. Removal procedure 1. Remove the IR rear cover. See P.88 2. Remove the IR upper rear cover/1 and the IR upper rear cover/2. See P.88 3. Remove two screws [1], and remove the bracket [2].
  • Page 194 Field Service Ver. 4.0 Jun. 2008 6. Other 7. Remove six screws [1] and take out the ADF table [2]. A00JF2C266DA 8. Disconnect the connector [1] and remove three screws [2]. A00JF2C267DA 9. Remove the spring [1] and the belt [2], and take out the scanner motor assy [3].
  • Page 195 6. Other Field Service Ver. 4.0 Jun. 2008 10. Remove two screws [1], and remove the scanner motor [2]. A00JF2C269DA B. Reinstall procedure 1. Temporarily secure the scanner motor assy [1] with three screws [2]. A00JF3C538DA 2. With the scanner drive gear set screw [1] located on the right-hand side as shown on the left, slide the scanner motor assy [2] to the left and...

  • Page 196: Original Glass Moving Motor (M202)

    Field Service Ver. 4.0 Jun. 2008 6. Other 6.3.56 Original glass moving motor (M202) 1. Remove the IR rear cover. See P.88 2. Remove the IR upper rear cover/1, the IR upper rear cover/2 and the IR upper rear cover/3. See P.88 3.

  • Page 197: Duplex Transport Motor (M7)

    6. Other Field Service Ver. 4.0 Jun. 2008 6. Remove two screws [1], and remove the original glass moving motor assy [2]. A02EF2C167DA 6.3.57 Duplex transport motor (M7) 1. Remove two screws [1], and remove the duplex cover [2]. A02EF2C544DA 2.

  • Page 198: Transport Motor (M1)

    Field Service Ver. 4.0 Jun. 2008 6. Other 6.3.58 Transport motor (M1) 1. Remove the PWB box. See P.138 2. Remove four screws [1], disconnect [2] [3] the connector [2], and remove the transport motor [3]. A02EF2C168DA 6.3.59 Color PC motor (M2) 1.

  • Page 199: Fusing Motor (M5)

    6. Other Field Service Ver. 4.0 Jun. 2008 6.3.60 Fusing motor (M5) 1. Remove the PWB box. See P.138 2. Remove five screws [1], and remove the bracket [2]. A02EF2C170DA 3. Remove four screws [1], disconnect the connector [2], and remove the fusing motor [3].

  • Page 200: Switchback Motor (M6)

    Field Service Ver. 4.0 Jun. 2008 6. Other 6.3.61 Switchback motor (M6) 1. Remove the paper exit rear cover. See P.87 2. Disconnect the connector [1]. 3. Remove four screws [2], unhook the tab [3], and remove the paper cool- ing fan motor assy [4].

  • Page 201: Fusing Retraction Motor (M12)

    6. Other Field Service Ver. 4.0 Jun. 2008 6. Disconnect the connector [1]. 7. Remove two screws [2], and remove the switchback motor [3]. NOTE • Care should be taken to avoid let- ting the lever [4] hit the housing and be damaged.

  • Page 202: Paper Feed Tray 1 Lift-Up Motor (M8)

    Field Service Ver. 4.0 Jun. 2008 6. Other 6.3.63 Paper feed tray 1 lift-up motor (M8) 1. Remove the tray 1. See P.94 2. Remove the tray 2. See P.94 3. Remove the right front cover/2. See P.84 4. Remove the lower rear cover/1 and the lower rear cover/2. See P.92 5.

  • Page 203: Paper Feed Tray 2 Lift-Up Motor (M9)

    6. Other Field Service Ver. 4.0 Jun. 2008 10. Remove three screws [1], and remove the paper feed tray 1 lift-up motor [2]. A02EF2C182DA 6.3.64 Paper feed tray 2 lift-up motor (M9) 1. Remove the tray 1. See P.94 2. Remove the tray 2. See P.94 3.
  • Page 204 Field Service Ver. 4.0 Jun. 2008 6. Other 7. Remove the harness from five wire saddles [1] and the edge cover [2]. A02EF2C542DA 8. Disconnect the connector [1], and remove the harness from the edge cover [2]. 9. Remove three screws [3], take out the paper feed tray 2 lift-up motor assy [4].

  • Page 205: Toner Supply Motor/Ck (M3)

    6. Other Field Service Ver. 4.0 Jun. 2008 6.3.65 Toner supply motor/CK (M3) 1. Remove the PWB box. See P.138 2. Disconnect the connector [2], remove two screws [1], and remove the toner supply motor/CK [3]. A02EF2C185DA 6.3.66 Toner supply motor/YM (M4) 1.

  • Page 206: Paper Feed Tray 1 Paper Feed Clutch (Cl1)

    Field Service Ver. 4.0 Jun. 2008 6. Other 6.3.67 Paper feed tray 1 paper feed clutch (CL1) 1. Remove the tray 1 paper feed assy. See the steps 1 to 4 of tray 1 feed roller/tray 1 pick-up roller removing procedure. See P.22 2.

  • Page 207: Paper Feed Tray 2 Vertical Transport Clutch (Cl3)

    6. Other Field Service Ver. 4.0 Jun. 2008 6.3.68 Paper feed tray 2 vertical transport clutch (CL3) 1. Remove the tray 2 paper feed assy. See the steps 1 to 5 of tray 2 feed roller/tray 2 pick-up roller removing procedure. See P.26 2.

  • Page 208: Paper Feed Tray 2 Paper Feed Clutch (Cl2)

    Field Service Ver. 4.0 Jun. 2008 6. Other 6.3.69 Paper feed tray 2 paper feed clutch (CL2) 1. Remove the tray 2 paper feed assy. See the steps 1 to 5 of tray 2 feed roller/tray 2 pick-up roller removing procedure. See P.26 2.

  • Page 209: Transfer Belt Retraction Clutch (Cl7)

    6. Other Field Service Ver. 4.0 Jun. 2008 6.3.71 Transfer belt retraction clutch (CL7) 1. Remove the fusing drive unit. See P.118 2. Disconnect the connector [2], remove three E-rings [1] and five screws [3], and remove the metal plate [4]. A02EF2C195DA 3.

  • Page 210: Tim. Roller Clutch (Cl6)

    Field Service Ver. 4.0 Jun. 2008 6. Other 3. Remove three screws [1] and the E- ring [2], and remove the developing clutch/K cover [3]. A02EF2C198DA 4. Disconnect the connector [1], and remove the developing clutch/K [2]. A02EF2C199DA 6.3.73 Tim. roller clutch (CL6) 1.

  • Page 211: Idc Registration Sensor/Mk (Idcs/Mk), Idc Registration Sensor/Yc (Idcs/Yc)

    6. Other Field Service Ver. 4.0 Jun. 2008 6.3.74 IDC registration sensor/MK (IDCS/MK), IDC registration sensor/YC (IDCS/YC) 1. Remove the transfer belt unit. See P.41 2. Remove the manual bypass tray unit. See P.102 3. Remove the shoulder screw [1]. A02EF2C201DA 4.
  • Page 212 Field Service Ver. 4.0 Jun. 2008 6. Other 7. Disconnect three connectors [1], and remove the vertical transport unit [2]. A02EF2C204DA 8. Remove three screws [1], and remove the metal plate [2]. NOTE • Both end screws has a spacer. Remove the screws, being careful not to drop the spacers.

  • Page 213: Scanner Drive Cables

    6. Other Field Service Ver. 4.0 Jun. 2008 6.3.75 Scanner drive cables A. Removal procedure 1. Remove the IR assy. See P.124 2. Remove the scanner assy. See P.110 3. Remove the scanner motor. See P.148 4. Remove the original glass moving unit. See P.105 5.
  • Page 214 Field Service Ver. 4.0 Jun. 2008 6. Other 7. Remove the hook side spring [1] of the scanner drive cables. A00JF2C435DA 8. Remove the bead side [1] of the scanner drive cables from the adjust- ment anchor. A00JF2C436DA 9. Remove the C-ring [1] and bearing [2].
  • Page 215 6. Other Field Service Ver. 4.0 Jun. 2008 10. Remove the screw [1], and remove the scanner drive gear [2]. 11. Remove the bearing [3]. A00JF2C438DA 12. Remove the shaft [1] and pulley [2]. A00JF2C439DA 13. Remove the screw [1] one each and take out the two pulleys [2] from the shaft.
  • Page 216 Field Service Ver. 4.0 Jun. 2008 6. Other B. reinstall procedure (1) Overall figure A00JF2C441DA (2) Winding of the scanner drive cables NOTE • The scanner drive cable differs in type between the front (silver) and the rear (black), which are colored differently. <Front>...
  • Page 217 6. Other Field Service Ver. 4.0 Jun. 2008 3. Twist the B side scanner drive cable around the pulley [1] starting from the rear groove in clockwise direction five times. NOTE • Make sure that no part of the cable rides on the other.
  • Page 218 Field Service Ver. 4.0 Jun. 2008 6. Other 6. Twist the B side scanner drive cable around the pulley [1] starting from the rear groove in anticlockwise direction five times. NOTE • Make sure that no part of the cable rides on the other.
  • Page 219 6. Other Field Service Ver. 4.0 Jun. 2008 9. Put the front/rear pulleys [1] into the shaft [2], and fix them with one screw each [3]. NOTE • Set the pulley at the direction as shown in the illustration. • Fix the pulley at the position as shown in the illustration.
  • Page 220 Field Service Ver. 4.0 Jun. 2008 6. Other <Front> 13. Place the fixed bead side of the scanner drive cable [1] to the pulley B [2], and place the fixed bead to the adjustment anchor [3]. NOTE • Make sure to hook the scanner drive cable to the outside groove of the pulley B.
  • Page 221 6. Other Field Service Ver. 4.0 Jun. 2008 16. Place the scanner drive cable to the pulley D [2] via the pulley C [1]. NOTE • Make sure to hook the scanner drive cable to the outside groove of the pulley D [2]. A00JF2C449DA 17.
  • Page 222 Field Service Ver. 4.0 Jun. 2008 6. Other <Front> 19. Place the hook side of the scanner drive cable [1] to the pulley A [2]. A00JF2C445DA 20. Place the scanner drive cable to the pulley B [2] via the pulley A [1]. NOTE •...
  • Page 223 6. Other Field Service Ver. 4.0 Jun. 2008 22. Remove the end of the spring [1] from the hook. Hook the end of the spring to the wire coming from the front. A00JF2C462DA 23. Remove the tape that fixes the front/rear pulleys. 24.

  • Page 224: Cleaning Procedure

    Field Service Ver. 4.0 Jun. 2008 6. Other Cleaning procedure NOTE • The alcohol described in the cleaning procedure represents the ethanol isopropyl alcohol. 6.4.1 Transfer belt unit 1. Remove the transfer belt unit. See P.41 2. Using a cleaning pad, wipe the trans- fer belt [1].

  • Page 225: Tray 1 Feed Roller, Tray 1 Pick-Up Roller, Tray 1 Separation Roller

    6. Other Field Service Ver. 4.0 Jun. 2008 6.4.3 Tray 1 feed roller, tray 1 pick-up roller, tray 1 separation roller 1. Remove the tray 1 paper feed assy. See the steps 1 to 4 of tray 1 feed roller/tray 1 pick-up roller removing procedure. See P.22 2.

  • Page 226: Tray 2 Feed Roller, Tray 2 Pick-Up Roller, Tray 2 Separation Roller

    Field Service Ver. 4.0 Jun. 2008 6. Other 6.4.4 Tray 2 feed roller, tray 2 pick-up roller, tray 2 separation roller 1. Remove the tray 2 paper feed assy. See the steps 1 to 5 of tray 2 feed roller/tray 2 pick-up roller removing procedure. See P.26 2.

  • Page 227: Tray 2 Transport Roller

    6. Other Field Service Ver. 4.0 Jun. 2008 6.4.5 Tray 2 transport roller 1. Open the vertical transport door. 2. Using a cleaning pad dampened with alcohol, wipe the tray 2 transport roller [1] clean of dirt. A02EF2C214DA 6.4.6 Manual bypass tray feed roller 1.

  • Page 228: Original Glass

    Field Service Ver. 4.0 Jun. 2008 6. Other 6.4.8 Original glass 1. Using a cleaning pad dampened with alcohol, wipe the original glass [1] clean of dirt. A00JF2C521DA 2. Clean the slit glass [2] with the cleaner [1]. A00JF2C522DB 6.4.9 Scanner rails 1.

  • Page 229: Mirrors (1St/2Nd/3Rd)

    6. Other Field Service Ver. 4.0 Jun. 2008 6.4.10 Mirrors (1st/2nd/3rd) 1. Remove the original glass. See P.89 2. Using a cleaning pad dampened with alcohol, wipe the mirror 1 [1] and mirror 2/3 [2]. A00JF2C392DA 6.4.11 Lens 1. Remove the original glass. See P.89 2.

  • Page 230: Ccd Sensor

    Field Service Ver. 4.0 Jun. 2008 6. Other 6.4.12 CCD sensor 1. Remove the original glass. See P.89 2. Remove nine screws [1], and remove the image processing board protec- tive shield [2]. A00JF2C156DA 3. Remove two screws [1], and remove the CCD sensor cover [2].

  • Page 231: Mount The Original Size Detection 2 Sensor (Ps205)

    6. Other Field Service Ver. 4.0 Jun. 2008 Mount the original size detection 2 sensor (PS205) 1. Remove the original glass. See P.89 2. Using the screw [2], mount the origi- nal size detection 2 sensor (PS205) [1] and fix it. A00JF2E595DB <How to set the harness>...
  • Page 232 Field Service Ver. 4.0 Jun. 2008 6. Other 3. Select [Service Mode] → [System 1] → [Original Size Detection], and set the original glass to [Table2]. A00JF2E587DA 4. Select [Service Mode] → [Machine] → [Org. Size Detecting Sensor Adj]. See P.347 A00JF2E588DA 5.

  • Page 233: Option Counter

    6. Other Field Service Ver. 4.0 Jun. 2008 Option counter 6.6.1 Installation method for the key counter 1. Remove the IR front cover. See P.89 2. Remove the knockouts [1] on the IR right cover. A02EF2C527DA 3. Run the key counter harness [1] out through the hole [2] on the IR right cover.
  • Page 234 Field Service Ver. 4.0 Jun. 2008 6. Other 5. Connect the key counter socket con- nector [1]. 6. Using two screws [3], secure the counter socket [2]. A02EF2C530DA 7. Using two screws [2], secure the key counter cover [1]. A00JF2C584DA 8.
  • Page 235 6. Other Field Service Ver. 4.0 Jun. 2008 Blank Page...

  • Page 236: Adjustment/Setting

    Field Service Ver. 4.0 Jun. 2008 7. How to use the adjustment section Adjustment/Setting How to use the adjustment section • “Adjustment/Setting” contains detailed information on the adjustment items and proce- dures for this machine. • Throughout this “Adjustment/Setting,” the default settings are indicated by “ ”. Advance checks •...

  • Page 237: Utility Mode

    8. Utility Mode Field Service Ver. 4.0 Jun. 2008 Utility Mode Touch Panel Adjustment Functions • To adjust the position of the touch panel display • Make this adjustment if the touch panel is slow to respond to a pressing action. •...

  • Page 238: Utility Mode Function Tree

    Field Service Ver. 4.0 Jun. 2008 8. Utility Mode Utility Mode function tree * The function tree is shown to comply with the format displayed on the screen. NOTE • Keys displayed on screens are different depending on the setting. •...
  • Page 239 8. Utility Mode Field Service Ver. 4.0 Jun. 2008 Utility Mode Ref. page User Settings Custom Copier Default Tab P.212 Display Settings Shortcut Key 1 P.212 Settings Shortcut Key 2 Scan/Fax Default Tab P.212 Settings Program Default P.213 Address Book Index Default P.213 Shortcut Key 1 P.213...
  • Page 240 Field Service Ver. 4.0 Jun. 2008 8. Utility Mode Utility Mode Ref. page User Settings Printer Basic Line Width Adjustment P.223 Settings Settings Paper Setting Paper Tray P.223 Paper Size P.223 2-Sided Print P.223 Binding Position P.224 Staple P.224 Punch P.224 Banner Paper Tray P.224...
  • Page 241 8. Utility Mode Field Service Ver. 4.0 Jun. 2008 Utility Mode Ref. page Administrator System Weekly Timer Weekly Timer ON/OFF Settings P.231 Setting Setting Settings Time Settings P.231 Date Settings P.231 Select Time for Power Save P.231 Password for Non-Business Hours P.231 Restrict User Copy Program Lock Settings...
  • Page 242 Field Service Ver. 4.0 Jun. 2008 8. Utility Mode Utility Mode Ref. page Administrator System Expert Color Color Registration Adjust P.242 Setting Setting Adjustment Registration (Yellow) Adjust Color Registration Adjust (Magenta) Color Registration Adjust (Cyan) Gradation Copy P.243 Adjustment Printer (Gradation) Printer (Resolution) Scanner Area Scanner Adjustment:...
  • Page 243 8. Utility Mode Field Service Ver. 4.0 Jun. 2008 Utility Mode Ref. page Administrator System Standard Size Original Glass Original Size Detect*** P.254 Settings Setting Setting*** Foolscap Size Setting*** P.254 Stamp Header/Footer Settings P.254 Settings Fax TX Settings P.255 Blank Page Print Settings P.255 Application Key Settings P.255...
  • Page 244 Field Service Ver. 4.0 Jun. 2008 8. Utility Mode Utility Mode Ref. page Administrator User Limiting Create Group P.266 Settings Authentica- Access to Apply Levels/Groups to Destinations P.266 tion/ Destinations Apply Levels/Groups to Users P.266 Account Track Authentica- General Settings P.267 tion Device Touch &...
  • Page 245 8. Utility Mode Field Service Ver. 4.0 Jun. 2008 Utility Mode Ref. page Administrator Copier Auto Zoom (Platen) P.302 Settings Settings Auto Zoom (ADF) P.302 Specify Default Tray when APS OFF P.302 Select Tray for Insert Sheet P.302 Print Jobs During Copy Operation P.303 Automatic Image Rotation P.303...
  • Page 246 Field Service Ver. 4.0 Jun. 2008 8. Utility Mode Utility Mode Ref. page Administrator Function Incomplete TX Hold P.311 Settings Settings Settings PC-Fax RX Setting P.311 TSI User Box Setting P.311 PBX Connection Setting P.312 Report Activity Report P.312 Settings TX Result Report P.312 Sequential TX Report...
  • Page 247 8. Utility Mode Field Service Ver. 4.0 Jun. 2008 Utility Mode Ref. page Administrator Security Security Password Rules P.321 Settings Settings Details Prohibited Functions When Authentication P.322 Error Confidential Document Access Method P.323 Manual Destination Input P.323 Print Data Capture P.323 Audit Log Settings P.324...

  • Page 248: Utility Mode Function Setting Procedure

    Field Service Ver. 4.0 Jun. 2008 8. Utility Mode Utility Mode Ref. page ⎯ Meter Count Check Print List Details ⎯ Coverage Rate ⎯ Copy ⎯ Print ⎯ Scan/Fax ⎯ Other ⎯ Remaining Copy Count *1 *1: Displayed after a user or account authentication if maximum limit is set for the number of copies the user or account can make.

  • Page 249: One-Touch User Box Registration

    8. Utility Mode Field Service Ver. 4.0 Jun. 2008 One-Touch User Box Registration • In a copier where the user authentication function that uses an external server or MFP is set to ON, when you operate the copier without performing user authentication, this menu is not displayed.
  • Page 250 Field Service Ver. 4.0 Jun. 2008 8. Utility Mode (6) WebDAV Functions • To register/change WebDAV address to send scanned data. Setting/ • A new address can be registered by touching [New]. Procedure • Select any displayed address to check, edit or delete the setting. (7) IP Address Fax •...

  • Page 251: Create User Box

    8. Utility Mode Field Service Ver. 4.0 Jun. 2008 (2) E-mail Body Functions • To register the e-mail message when transmitting the scanned data. Setting/ • A new address can be registered by touching [New]. Procedure • Select any displayed address to detail check or delete the setting. •...

  • Page 252: Limiting Access To Destinations

    Field Service Ver. 4.0 Jun. 2008 8. Utility Mode 8.4.3 Limiting Access to Destinations • It will not be displayed when the following setting is set to “ON.” [Administrator Settings] → [Security Settings] → [Enhanced Security Mode] A. Outline • The Limiting Access to Destinations setting allows or restricts individual user's access to each destination.

  • Page 253: User Settings

    8. Utility Mode Field Service Ver. 4.0 Jun. 2008 User Settings 8.5.1 System Settings A. Language Selection Functions • To select the language on the LCD display. • To change the language on the control panel to another language. Setting/ •...
  • Page 254 Field Service Ver. 4.0 Jun. 2008 8. Utility Mode (4) Print Lists • It will not be displayed when the following setting shows that authentication device or the vendor is mounted. [Service Mode] → [Billing Setting] → [Management Function Choice] (It will be displayed when the key counter is mounted.) •...
  • Page 255 8. Utility Mode Field Service Ver. 4.0 Jun. 2008 (2) Sleep Mode Settings Functions • To set the time until sleep mode starts operating after the last key operation has been completed. • Turn all lines OFF except 5 V line for control. •...
  • Page 256 Field Service Ver. 4.0 Jun. 2008 8. Utility Mode <When the JS-505 is mounted> Functions • To set the priority output tray for each application (Copy print, Printer, Fax and Print Reports). • To change the prior output tray according to the application. Setting/ •...

  • Page 257: Custom Display Settings

    8. Utility Mode Field Service Ver. 4.0 Jun. 2008 Blank Page Print Settings • It will be displayed only when the following setting is set to “Level 2.” [Administrator Settings] → [Security Settings] → [Administrator Security Levels] • It will not be displayed when the following setting shows that vendor is mounted. [Service Mode] →...
  • Page 258 Field Service Ver. 4.0 Jun. 2008 8. Utility Mode (2) Program Default Functions • To set the default display for the program screen during scan/fax mode. • To keep the default display on the program screen which frequently changes during scan/fax mode Setting/ •...
  • Page 259 8. Utility Mode Field Service Ver. 4.0 Jun. 2008 C. Copy Screen • It will not be displayed when the following setting shows that key counter, vendor, or authentication device 1 is mounted. [Service Mode] → [Billing Setting] → [Management Function Choice] However, this menu is available when the key counter is installed and [The next job reser- vation] is set to License.
  • Page 260 Field Service Ver. 4.0 Jun. 2008 8. Utility Mode F. Left Panel Display Default Functions • Specifies an item that is shown as a default on the left panel display. • To change the item that is shown as a default on the left panel display. Job List (List Display) : Displays a list of jobs that are both being printed and waiting to be printed.
  • Page 261 8. Utility Mode Field Service Ver. 4.0 Jun. 2008 C. Auto Sort/Group Selection Functions • Selects whether to use the auto sort/group selection function when a job has output of two or more sheets. Yes : Automatically disables the Auto sort/group selection when a sheet of original is placed on the ADF and the start key is pressed.
  • Page 262 Field Service Ver. 4.0 Jun. 2008 8. Utility Mode E. Default Enlarge Display Settings • Displayed only when you select [Utility/Counter] → [User Settings] → [Copier Settings] in the enlarge display mode. Functions • To make default settings for the enlarge display mode. * The machine is initialized at the following timings: •...
  • Page 263 8. Utility Mode Field Service Ver. 4.0 Jun. 2008 H. Enlargement Rotation • It will not be displayed when the following setting shows that vendor1 is mounted. [Service Mode] → [Billing Setting] → [Management Function Choice] Functions • Sets whether to rotate images of which length is more than 297 mm in the main scan direction (in the horizontal direction on the ADF or the Original glass) in the copying process.
  • Page 264 Field Service Ver. 4.0 Jun. 2008 8. Utility Mode L. Select Tray for Insert Sheet • It will be displayed only when the following setting is set to “Level 1” or “Level 2.” [Administrator Settings] → [Security Settings] → [Administrator Security Levels] Functions •...

  • Page 265: Default Scan/Fax Settings

    8. Utility Mode Field Service Ver. 4.0 Jun. 2008 B. Black Compression Level Functions • To set the monochrome compression method for scanning in the monochrome mode while in scan/fax mode. • To be used when changing the monochrome mode while in scanner mode. Setting/ •...

  • Page 266: Default Enlarge Display Settings

    Field Service Ver. 4.0 Jun. 2008 8. Utility Mode 8.5.6 Default Enlarge Display Settings • Displayed only when you select [Utility/Counter] → [User Settings] → [Scan/Fax Settings] in the enlarge display mode. Functions • To make default settings for the enlarge display mode. * The machine is initialized at the following timings: •...
  • Page 267 8. Utility Mode Field Service Ver. 4.0 Jun. 2008 (2) Number of Copies Functions • To set the number to be copied when not specified by the printer driver during PC printing. • To use when the number cannot be specified by the printer driver during printing from Windows DOS, etc.
  • Page 268 Field Service Ver. 4.0 Jun. 2008 8. Utility Mode (7) Binding Direction Adjustment Functions • Specifies the alignment between the sides of paper (binding position adjustment) in duplex printing. • To achieve faster printing performance, select Productivity Priority. To address mis- alignment problems between sides of copies in the horizontal and vertical directions, select Finishing Priority.
  • Page 269 8. Utility Mode Field Service Ver. 4.0 Jun. 2008 (4) Binding Position Functions • To set the binding direction during duplex printing when not specified by the printer driver during PC printing. • To use when binding direction cannot be specified by the printer driver during printing by Windows DOS, etc.
  • Page 270 Field Service Ver. 4.0 Jun. 2008 8. Utility Mode (2) Symbol Set Functions • To set the font symbol set when not specified by the printer driver during PC printing. • To use when the font symbol set cannot be specified by the printer driver during print- ing from Windows DOS, etc.
  • Page 271 8. Utility Mode Field Service Ver. 4.0 Jun. 2008 (2) ICC Profile Settings Functions • To select a profile to be used for print jobs from a computer when a profile is not specified by printer driver. • Possible to set a profile separately for each of the following items. Photo-RGB Color Photo-Output Profile Text-RGB Color...

  • Page 272: Change Password

    Field Service Ver. 4.0 Jun. 2008 8. Utility Mode 8.5.8 Change Password • When conducting user authentication (MFP only), it will be displayed only when the authentication is complete. • This menu is available only when box administrator authentication is established during user authentication or account track.

  • Page 273: Administrator Settings

    8. Utility Mode Field Service Ver. 4.0 Jun. 2008 Administrator Settings • The Administrator Settings will be available by entering the administrator password (8 digits) set by the Administrator Settings or Service Mode. (The administrator password is initially set to “12345678.”) NOTE •...
  • Page 274 Field Service Ver. 4.0 Jun. 2008 8. Utility Mode (4) Enter Power Save Mode Functions • To set whether to immediately switch to the power save mode after printing in case of receiving the fax during power save mode. • To immediately switch to the power save mode after printing in case of receiving the fax during power save mode.
  • Page 275 8. Utility Mode Field Service Ver. 4.0 Jun. 2008 (3) Bin Setting • It will be displayed only when the optional mailbin kit MT-502 is mounted. Functions • Assign the tray 1 of the finisher to the mailbin 5, and the tray 2 to the mailbin 6. •...
  • Page 276 Field Service Ver. 4.0 Jun. 2008 8. Utility Mode E. Weekly Timer Settings (1) Weekly Timer ON/OFF Settings Functions • To set whether to use or not to use the weekly timer. • To set the weekly timer. Setting/ • The default setting is OFF. Procedure “OFF”...
  • Page 277 8. Utility Mode Field Service Ver. 4.0 Jun. 2008 F. Restrict User Access (1) Copy Program Lock Settings Functions • To set the prohibition for modifying the registered copy program. • To be used when prohibiting the user from changing the copy program. Setting/ 1.
  • Page 278 Field Service Ver. 4.0 Jun. 2008 8. Utility Mode <Changing Zoom Ratio> Functions • To set whether to allow or restrict the change on the registered magnification. Setting/ • The default setting is Allow. Procedure “Allow” Restrict <Change the “From” Address> Functions •...
  • Page 279 8. Utility Mode Field Service Ver. 4.0 Jun. 2008 (2) Printer Adjustment <Leading Edge Adjustment> • It will not be displayed when the following setting shows that Management Device 1 is mounted during the device power is OFF or no authentication is set. [Service Mode] →...
  • Page 280 Field Service Ver. 4.0 Jun. 2008 8. Utility Mode <Centering> • It will not be displayed when the following setting shows that Management Device 1 is mounted during the device power is OFF or no authentication is set. [Service Mode] → [Billing Setting] → [Management Function Choice] •...
  • Page 281 8. Utility Mode Field Service Ver. 4.0 Jun. 2008 <Leading Edge Adjustment (Duplex Side 2)> • It will not be displayed when the following setting shows that Management Device 1 is mounted during the device power is OFF or no authentication is set. [Service Mode] →...
  • Page 282 Field Service Ver. 4.0 Jun. 2008 8. Utility Mode <Centering (Duplex 2nd Side)> Functions • To vary the print start position in the main scan direction for each paper source in the 2-sided mode. • To use when the optional automatic duplex unit AD-503 is set up. •...
  • Page 283 8. Utility Mode Field Service Ver. 4.0 Jun. 2008 <Vertical Adjustment> • It will be displayed only when the following setting is set to “Level 2.” [Service Mode] → [Enhanced Security] → [Administrator Feature Level] Functions • To synchronize the paper transport speed with the image writing speed. •...
  • Page 284 Field Service Ver. 4.0 Jun. 2008 8. Utility Mode <Media Adjustment> Functions • Adjust the 2nd image transfer output (ATVC) on the 1st page and the 2nd page for each paper type. • This function is provided to open [Transfer Output Fine Adjustment] → [2nd Transfer Adjust] of Service Mode up to administrator and the fine-adjusted value is reflected in the Service Mode setting.
  • Page 285 8. Utility Mode Field Service Ver. 4.0 Jun. 2008 (4) Density Adjustment <Thick Paper Image Density-Yellow, Magenta, Cyan, Black> Functions • To fine-adjust density of printed images of each color for thick paper and OHP trans- parencies. (Only black color adjustable for OHP transparencies) •...
  • Page 286 Field Service Ver. 4.0 Jun. 2008 8. Utility Mode <Initialize+Image Stabilization> Functions • To carry out an image stabilization sequence after the historical data of image stabili- zation control has been initialized. • Use if an image problem persists even after [Gradation Adjustment] has been exe- cuted.
  • Page 287 8. Utility Mode Field Service Ver. 4.0 Jun. 2008 (6) Color Registration Adjust • It will not be displayed when the following setting shows that Management Device 1 is mounted during the device power is OFF or no authentication is set. [Service Mode] →...
  • Page 288 Field Service Ver. 4.0 Jun. 2008 8. Utility Mode (7) Gradation Adjustment • It will not be displayed when the following setting is set to “ON.” [Service Mode] → [Imaging Process Adjustment] → [Dev. Bias Choice] • It will not be displayed when the following setting shows that Management Device 1 is mounted during the device power is OFF or no authentication is set.
  • Page 289 8. Utility Mode Field Service Ver. 4.0 Jun. 2008 (8) Scanner Area • Use the following color chart for the adjustment of the scanner section. • If the color chart is not available, a scale may be used instead. • It will be displayed only when the following setting is set to “Level 2.” [Service Mode] →...
  • Page 290 Field Service Ver. 4.0 Jun. 2008 8. Utility Mode <Scanner Adjustment: Leading Edge> Functions • To adjust variations in mounting accuracy and sensitivity of the scanner home sensor and in mounting accuracy of the original width scale by varying the scan start posi- tion in the main scan direction.
  • Page 291 8. Utility Mode Field Service Ver. 4.0 Jun. 2008 <Scanner Adjustment: Centering> Functions • To adjust part-to-part variations in accuracy of IR parts and their mounting accuracy by varying the scan start position in the main scan direction. • When the CCD unit is replaced. •...
  • Page 292 Field Service Ver. 4.0 Jun. 2008 8. Utility Mode <Horizontal Adjustment> Functions • To adjust the zoom ratio in the main scan direction for the scanner section. • The CCD unit has been replaced. Adjustment •Measure C width on the color chart and on Specification the sample copy, and adjust the gap to be within the following specification.
  • Page 293 8. Utility Mode Field Service Ver. 4.0 Jun. 2008 <Vertical Adjustment> Functions • To adjust the zoom ratio in the sub scan direction for the scanner section • The scanner assy has been replaced. • The scanner motor has been replaced. •...
  • Page 294 Field Service Ver. 4.0 Jun. 2008 8. Utility Mode (10) Line Detection <Prior Detection Setting> Functions • To set whether or not to perform pre-detection of stain on the ADF original glass. • To set the detection level of the pre-detection of stain on the ADF original glass. •...
  • Page 295 8. Utility Mode Field Service Ver. 4.0 Jun. 2008 <Detection While Feeding Setting> Functions • To set the operation for detection and removing operation of stain on the ADF original glass when feeding the original. • Use when changing the operation for detection and removing operation of stain on the ADF original glass when feeding the original.
  • Page 296 Field Service Ver. 4.0 Jun. 2008 8. Utility Mode (3) Meter Counter List • Setting will be available only when the following setting shows that either authentication device, management device 2, vendor 2 is mounted. [Service Mode] → [Billing Setting] → [Management Function Choice] Functions •...
  • Page 297 8. Utility Mode Field Service Ver. 4.0 Jun. 2008 (3) Job Reset <When Account is changed> • It will not be displayed when the following setting shows that authentication device is mounted. [Service Mode] → [Billing Setting] → [Management Function Choice] (It will be displayed when the key counter is mounted.) Functions •...
  • Page 298 Field Service Ver. 4.0 Jun. 2008 8. Utility Mode J. User Box Settings (1) Delete Unused User Box Functions • To delete the unnecessary box without data. Setting/ 1. Touch [Delete Unused User Box]. Procedure 2. Touch [Yes] on the Check screen. (2) Delete Secure Print Documents Functions •...
  • Page 299 8. Utility Mode Field Service Ver. 4.0 Jun. 2008 (7) External Memory Function Settings Functions • This operation enables or disables functions using an external memory connected to this machine. • Capability to enable [Save Document] and [Print Document] separately. Save Document : a function that saves scanned documents into the external memory using [Save Document] in the box mode.

  • Page 300: Administrator/Machine Settings

    Field Service Ver. 4.0 Jun. 2008 8. Utility Mode (2) Fax TX Settings Functions • Specifies whether to reset a stamp setting when fax is sent. Setting/ • The default setting is Cancel. Procedure “Cancel” Do Not Cancel M. Blank Page Print Settings Functions •...

  • Page 301: One-Touch/User Box Registration

    8. Utility Mode Field Service Ver. 4.0 Jun. 2008 8.6.3 One-Touch/User Box Registration A. Create One-Touch Destination Address Book <E-mail> Functions • To register/change the e-mail address for transmitting the scanned data by e-mail. Setting/ • Touch [New] to register the new address. Procedure •...
  • Page 302 Field Service Ver. 4.0 Jun. 2008 8. Utility Mode <IP Address Fax> • Setting will be available only when [IP Address FAX] is set to “ON” in the following set- tings. [Administrator Settings] → [Network Settings] → [Network Fax Settings] → [Network Fax Function Settings] Functions •...
  • Page 303 8. Utility Mode Field Service Ver. 4.0 Jun. 2008 B. Create User Box • It will not be displayed when the following setting shows that authentication device 1 is mounted. [Service Mode] → [Billing Setting] → [Management Function Choice] • It will not be displayed when the following setting shows that vendor is mounted. [Service Mode] →...
  • Page 304 Field Service Ver. 4.0 Jun. 2008 8. Utility Mode C. One-Touch/User Box Registration List • It will not be displayed when the following setting shows that vendor is mounted. [Service Mode] → [Billing Setting] → [Management Function Choice] (It will be displayed when the Key counter is mounted or when the following setting shows that switch No.33 is set to [01] at HEX assignment.

  • Page 305: User Authentication/Account Track

    8. Utility Mode Field Service Ver. 4.0 Jun. 2008 D. Maximum Number of User Boxes Functions • Set the maximum of public, personal, and group boxes that individual users can hold. Setting/ 1. Select a user box type and name. Procedure 2.
  • Page 306 Field Service Ver. 4.0 Jun. 2008 8. Utility Mode (3) Account Track Functions • To set whether to enable the account track function or not. • To enable the account track function. Setting/ • The default setting is OFF. Procedure “OFF”...
  • Page 307 8. Utility Mode Field Service Ver. 4.0 Jun. 2008 (7) Number of User Counters Assigned • It will not be displayed when the following setting shows that management device 2 is mounted. [Service Mode] → [Billing Setting] → [Management Function Choice] Functions •...
  • Page 308 Field Service Ver. 4.0 Jun. 2008 8. Utility Mode B. User Authentication Setting • The settings are available only when carrying out the user authentication. (1) Administrative Setting <User Name List> • It cannot select [OFF] when the following setting is set to “ON.” [Administrator Settings] →...
  • Page 309 8. Utility Mode Field Service Ver. 4.0 Jun. 2008 <ID & Print Operation Settings> • This is displayed only when the function enhanced version 2 or later firmware is installed. • It will be displayed only when the following setting shows that authentication device is set to “installed”.
  • Page 310 Field Service Ver. 4.0 Jun. 2008 8. Utility Mode C. Account Track Setting • The settings are available only when carrying out the account track. (1) Account Track Registration Functions • To register and change the account. • To register, change or delete the account for account track. Setting/ 1.
  • Page 311 8. Utility Mode Field Service Ver. 4.0 Jun. 2008 F. External Server Settings Functions • Registers and sets an external server that is used for user authentication. • To make user authentication by external server authentication. Setting/ 1. Select one from No. 1 to No. 20 and touch [NEW]. Procedure 2.
  • Page 312 Field Service Ver. 4.0 Jun. 2008 8. Utility Mode H. Authentication Device Settings • The function can be displayed only when the authentication device 2 is set to Set by [Service Mode] → [Billing Setting] → [Management Function Choice] (1) General Settings Functions •...

  • Page 313: Network Setting

    8. Utility Mode Field Service Ver. 4.0 Jun. 2008 8.6.5 Network Setting A. TCP/IP Settings (1) TCP/IP Settings Functions • To set whether to enable or disable TCP/IP settings. Setting/ • The default setting is ON. Procedure “ON” NOTE • When the setting is changed, turn off the main power switch and turn it on again more than 10 seconds after.
  • Page 314 Field Service Ver. 4.0 Jun. 2008 8. Utility Mode (4) DNS Domain Functions • To set whether or not to enable the auto obtaining for the DNS domain name. • To set the DNS default domain name. • To set the DNS search domain name. •...
  • Page 315 8. Utility Mode Field Service Ver. 4.0 Jun. 2008 (8) IP Filtering (Deny Access) Functions • To set the IP filtering (Deny Access). • When [Enable] is set, select one from Set 1 to Set 5 and specify the range of IP addresses to be allowed using the 10-key pad.
  • Page 316 Field Service Ver. 4.0 Jun. 2008 8. Utility Mode <IKE Settings> Functions • To make the settings that relate to IKE (Internet Key Exchange) protocol which is used for IPsec communication. • Settings can be made independently for four different sets (Group 1 to 4). Setting/ <Group>...
  • Page 317 8. Utility Mode Field Service Ver. 4.0 Jun. 2008 <IPsec SA Settings> Functions • To make the settings that relate to IPsec SA (Security Association) which is used for IPsec communication. • Settings can be made independently for eight different sets (Group 1 to 8). Setting/ <Group Set Number>...
  • Page 318 Field Service Ver. 4.0 Jun. 2008 8. Utility Mode <Peer> Functions • To register destinations used for IPsec communication. • Settings can be made independently for different ten sets (Group 1 to 10). Setting/ <Peer> Procedure • Among Group 1 to 10, select a group where settings are made. •...
  • Page 319 8. Utility Mode Field Service Ver. 4.0 Jun. 2008 (2) Netware Print Settings Functions • To set whether to use the NetWare print mode. • To set the NetWare print mode. • To display NetWare status. • To change the NetWare print mode. •...
  • Page 320 Field Service Ver. 4.0 Jun. 2008 8. Utility Mode (6) P Server Settings: File Server Name Functions • To set the file server name. • To set the full server name for the print server to logon. Setting/ 1. Touch [File Server Name]. Procedure 2.
  • Page 321 8. Utility Mode Field Service Ver. 4.0 Jun. 2008 C. http Server Settings • It will not be displayed when the following setting shows that authentication device is mounted. [Service Mode] → [Billing Setting] → [Management Function Choice] (1) http Server Settings Functions •...
  • Page 322 Field Service Ver. 4.0 Jun. 2008 8. Utility Mode (7) IPP Authentication Settings Functions • To set whether or not to use the IPP authentication setting. • To conduct IPP authentication. Setting/ • The default setting is ON. Procedure “ON” (8) Authentication Method Functions •...
  • Page 323 8. Utility Mode Field Service Ver. 4.0 Jun. 2008 (2) FTP TX Settings: Proxy Server Address Functions • To set the proxy server address. • To enter the proxy server address. Setting/ 1. Touch [Host Address]. Procedure 2. Select [Input Host Name], [IPv4 Address Input], or [IPv6 Address Input] and enter a host address.
  • Page 324 Field Service Ver. 4.0 Jun. 2008 8. Utility Mode E. SMB Setting • It will not be displayed when the following setting shows that authentication device is mounted. [Service Mode] → [Billing Setting] → [Management Function Choice] (1) Client Settings Functions •...
  • Page 325 8. Utility Mode Field Service Ver. 4.0 Jun. 2008 (5) Print Settings: Workgroup Functions • To set the workgroup. • To set the workgroup. Setting/ 1. Touch [Workgroup]. Procedure 2. Enter the workgroup (up to 15 characters) on the on-screen keyboard, and touch [OK].
  • Page 326 Field Service Ver. 4.0 Jun. 2008 8. Utility Mode F. LDAP Settings • It will not be displayed when the following setting shows that authentication device is mounted. [Service Mode] → [Billing Setting] → [Management Function Choice] (1) Enabling LDAP Functions •...
  • Page 327 8. Utility Mode Field Service Ver. 4.0 Jun. 2008 <Check Connection> • It will not be displayed when [Enabling LDAP] is set to “OFF.” • It will not be displayed when the following is set to “Restrict.” [Administrator Settings] → [Security Settings] → [Security Details] → [Manual Destina- tion Input] Functions •...
  • Page 328 Field Service Ver. 4.0 Jun. 2008 8. Utility Mode <Port Number (SSL)> Functions • To set the port number for LDAP server when using SSL. • To enter the port number for LDAP server when using SSL. Setting/ 1. Touch [Input]. Procedure 2.
  • Page 329 8. Utility Mode Field Service Ver. 4.0 Jun. 2008 <Login Name> Functions • To set the login name to connect to LDAP server. • To set the login name to connect to LDAP server. Setting/ 1. Touch [Login Name]. Procedure 2.
  • Page 330 Field Service Ver. 4.0 Jun. 2008 8. Utility Mode <Scan to E-mail> Functions • To set whether or not to transfer scanned data by e-mail. • To use when not transferring scanned data by e-mail. Setting/ • The default setting is ON. Procedure “ON”...
  • Page 331 8. Utility Mode Field Service Ver. 4.0 Jun. 2008 <Connection Timeout> Functions • To set the timeout period for connection in transmitting e-mail to SMTP server. • To change the timeout period for connection in transmitting e-mail to SMTP server. Setting/ •...
  • Page 332 Field Service Ver. 4.0 Jun. 2008 8. Utility Mode <Detail Settings: POP Before SMTP Authentication> Functions • To set whether or not to enable the POP Before SMTP authentication. • To use when conducting POP Before SMTP authentication. Setting/ • The default setting is OFF. Procedure “OFF”...
  • Page 333 8. Utility Mode Field Service Ver. 4.0 Jun. 2008 <Port No.> Functions • To set the port No. for transmitting with POP server. • To enter the port No. for transmitting with POP server. Setting/ 1. Touch [Input]. Procedure 2. Touch the Clear key. 3.
  • Page 334 Field Service Ver. 4.0 Jun. 2008 8. Utility Mode <Polling Interval> Functions • To set a polling interval at which a POP server is checked for new messages. Setting/ • The default setting is 15 minutes. Procedure 1 to 60 minutes (3) S/MIME Communication Settings Functions •...
  • Page 335 8. Utility Mode Field Service Ver. 4.0 Jun. 2008 H. SNMP Setting (1) SNMP Setting Functions • To set whether to use SNMP (Simple Network Management Protocol) or not. • To set the SNMP version to be used. • Not to use SNMP. •...
  • Page 336 Field Service Ver. 4.0 Jun. 2008 8. Utility Mode <Discovery User Permissions> Functions • To set whether or not to enable the discovery authority user which is used for SNMP Setting/ • The default setting is ON. Procedure “ON” <Discovery User Name Settings> Functions •...
  • Page 337 8. Utility Mode Field Service Ver. 4.0 Jun. 2008 <Write User Name Settings> Functions • To set the name of the reading/writing authority user which is used for SNMP v3. Setting/ 1. Touch [Write User Name]. Procedure 2. Enter the write user name (up to 32 characters) on the on-screen keyboard, and touch [OK].
  • Page 338 Field Service Ver. 4.0 Jun. 2008 8. Utility Mode (3) Zone Name Functions • To set the zone name connected with AppleTalk network. • To set the zone name connected with AppleTalk network. Setting/ 1. Touch [Zone Name]. Procedure 2. Enter the zone name (up to 31 characters) on the on-screen keyboard, and touch [OK].
  • Page 339 8. Utility Mode Field Service Ver. 4.0 Jun. 2008 (2) TCP Socket (ASCII Mode) Functions • To set whether or not to set the TCP socket for ASCII mode. • To set the port number which is used for TCP socket transmission by ASCII mode. •...
  • Page 340 Field Service Ver. 4.0 Jun. 2008 8. Utility Mode (3) SMTP RX Settings Functions • To set SMTP RX when network fax function is being used. • To use SMTP RX function when network fax function is being used. • To set SMTP RX port number and connecting time out period when network fax func- tion is being used.
  • Page 341 8. Utility Mode Field Service Ver. 4.0 Jun. 2008 <WebDAV Client Settings: Password> Functions • To set the password for WebDAV authentication. Setting/ 1. Touch [Password]. Procedure 2. Enter the password on the on-screen keyboard, and touch [OK]. <WebDAV Client Settings: Connection Timeout> Functions •...
  • Page 342 Field Service Ver. 4.0 Jun. 2008 8. Utility Mode <Web Service Common Settings: SSL Setting> Functions • To set whether to use SSL when using Web Service function. Setting/ • The default setting is OFF. Procedure “OFF” (2) Printer Settings <Printer Settings>...
  • Page 343 8. Utility Mode Field Service Ver. 4.0 Jun. 2008 <Scanner Settings: Scanner Name> Functions • To set the WS scanner name. Setting/ 1. Touch [Scanner Name]. Procedure 2. Enter the friendly name (up to 63 characters) on the on-screen keyboard, and touch [OK].
  • Page 344 Field Service Ver. 4.0 Jun. 2008 8. Utility Mode (2) Time Adjustment Setting Functions • To set whether to enable or disable the NTP setting. • To synchronize the time between the server and the client. Setting/ • The default setting is OFF. Procedure “OFF”...
  • Page 345 8. Utility Mode Field Service Ver. 4.0 Jun. 2008 <Register Notification Address (IPX Address)> Functions • To set IPX addresses to which machine status notifications are sent. • Use this function when setting IPX addresses to which machine status notifications are sent.
  • Page 346 Field Service Ver. 4.0 Jun. 2008 8. Utility Mode <Model Name> Functions • To set the device name for identifying the copier when reporting the total counter. Setting/ 1. Touch [Model Name]. Procedure 2. Enter the model name (up to 20 one-byte characters) on the on-screen keyboard, and touch [OK].

  • Page 347: Copier Settings

    8. Utility Mode Field Service Ver. 4.0 Jun. 2008 <Prefix/Suffix Setting> Functions • To register or change the prefix or suffix. • Eight types of prefix and suffix can be added. Prefix: Letters added to the top of the text (header part) Suffix: Letters added to the bottom of the text (footer part) •...

  • Page 348: Printer Settings

    Field Service Ver. 4.0 Jun. 2008 8. Utility Mode E. Print Jobs During Copy Operation Functions • To set whether to receive printing jobs for print data or fax data during copy operation. • To restrict receiving printing jobs for print data or fax data during copy operation. Accept : Receives the print data or fax data and print Receive Only : Print data or fax data will be printed when the copy operation is...

  • Page 349: Fax Settings

    8. Utility Mode Field Service Ver. 4.0 Jun. 2008 C. Print XPS Errors Functions • To set whether to print error information when an error occurs while printing a XPS file. Setting/ • The default setting is Yes. Procedure “Yes” 8.6.8 Fax Settings •...
  • Page 350 Field Service Ver. 4.0 Jun. 2008 8. Utility Mode (3) Footer Position Functions • To set whether to print the footer when transmitting fax. • To print the footer when transmitting fax. Setting/ • The default setting is OFF. Procedure Inside Body Text Outside Body Text “OFF”...
  • Page 351 8. Utility Mode Field Service Ver. 4.0 Jun. 2008 (4) Number of Redials Functions • To set the number of redials. • To change the number of times to redial when the line is busy, etc. • The line which can be set up is different depending on the country. Setting/ •...
  • Page 352 Field Service Ver. 4.0 Jun. 2008 8. Utility Mode (3) Print Paper Selection Functions • To set the priority for paper feed tray when receiving fax. • To change the priority for paper feed tray when receiving fax. Auto select : Selected automatically Priority Size : Printed on size with priority.
  • Page 353 8. Utility Mode Field Service Ver. 4.0 Jun. 2008 (8) Print Separate Fax Pages • It will not be displayed when [Duplex print (RX)] is set to “ON.” Functions • To set whether to divide the original into pages when it is longer than the standard size.
  • Page 354 Field Service Ver. 4.0 Jun. 2008 8. Utility Mode <Relay Printing> • It will be displayed when the following setting is set to “ON.” [Service Mode] → [FAX] → [System] → [Display Setting] → [Relay] Functions • To set whether to use the relay print function. •...
  • Page 355 8. Utility Mode Field Service Ver. 4.0 Jun. 2008 (2) Memory RX Setting • It will be displayed only when the following setting is set to “ON.” [Service Mode] → [FAX] → [System] → [Display Setting] → [Compulsory Memory RX] •...
  • Page 356 Field Service Ver. 4.0 Jun. 2008 8. Utility Mode (5) Incomplete TX Hold • It will be displayed when the following setting is set to “ON.” [Service Mode] → [FAX] → [System] → [Display Setting] → [Re-Transmission] • It will not be displayed when the following setting shows that Management Device 2 is mounted.
  • Page 357 8. Utility Mode Field Service Ver. 4.0 Jun. 2008 F. PBX Connection Setting Functions • To set whether to use PBX connection setting or not. • This will be used when the machine is connected to PBX line. Setting/ • The default setting is No. Procedure •...
  • Page 358 Field Service Ver. 4.0 Jun. 2008 8. Utility Mode (5) Confidential RX Report Functions • To set whether to print out the confidential RX report. • To print out the confidential RX report. Setting/ • The default setting is ON. Procedure “ON”...
  • Page 359 8. Utility Mode Field Service Ver. 4.0 Jun. 2008 (10) Broadcast Result Report Functions • To set the format to output the broadcast result report. • To print out the broadcast result report All Destinations : Outputs all reports after transmitting to all addresses Each Destination : Outputs a report after each transmission Setting/ •...
  • Page 360 Field Service Ver. 4.0 Jun. 2008 8. Utility Mode (15) Print E-mail Message Body • Settings will be available only when [Internet Fax] is set to “ON” in the following settings. [Administrator Settings] → [Network Setting] → [Network Fax Setting] → [Network Fax Function Settings] Functions •...
  • Page 361 8. Utility Mode Field Service Ver. 4.0 Jun. 2008 <Line Monitor Sound> Functions • To set whether or not to output the line monitor sound of the expanded line from the speaker. Setting/ • The default setting is ON. Procedure “ON”...
  • Page 362 Field Service Ver. 4.0 Jun. 2008 8. Utility Mode J. Network Fax Settings • It will be displayed only when either [IP Address Fax] or [Internet Fax] is set to “ON” in the following settings. [Administrator Settings] → [Network Settings] → [Network Fax Settings] → [Network Fax Function Settings] (1) Black Compression Level •...

  • Page 363: System Connection

    8. Utility Mode Field Service Ver. 4.0 Jun. 2008 (3) I-Fax Advanced Settings • It will be displayed only when [Internet Fax] is set to “ON” in the following settings. [Administrator Settings] → [Network Settings] → [Network Fax Settings] → [Network Fax Function Settings] Functions •...

  • Page 364: Security Settings

    Field Service Ver. 4.0 Jun. 2008 8. Utility Mode (3) SSL • It will be displayed when certificate is issued from PageScope Web Connection. Functions • To set whether to encrypt access from other systems by SSL when using Page Scope Data Administrator.
  • Page 365 8. Utility Mode Field Service Ver. 4.0 Jun. 2008 B. User Box Admin. Setting Functions • To set whether to allow or restrict the box administrator to use the system. • To allow the box administrator to use the system. The box administrator is the special administrator for box, who is allowed to browse contents in common box / individual box without the password.
  • Page 366 Field Service Ver. 4.0 Jun. 2008 8. Utility Mode D. Security Details (1) Password Rules Functions • To set whether to apply the password rules. • To apply the password rule to enhance security. • Passwords to be covered: CE password, administrator password, user box password, user password, account track password, passwords for confidential documents.
  • Page 367 8. Utility Mode Field Service Ver. 4.0 Jun. 2008 (2) Prohibited Functions When Authentication Error Functions • To set the function for prohibiting authentication operation in order to prevent the unauthorized access. • To use when setting the system to prohibit authentication failure when conducting authentication by password, etc.
  • Page 368 Field Service Ver. 4.0 Jun. 2008 8. Utility Mode (3) Confidential Document Access Method Functions • To display the status of the authentication system on the control panel for the confi- dential document access. • It cannot be changed at the operator’s option since it will automatically be set accord- ing to the [Prohibit Functions When Auth.
  • Page 369 8. Utility Mode Field Service Ver. 4.0 Jun. 2008 (6) Audit Log Settings • It will be displayed when the following setting shows that switch No.42 is set to [01] at HEX assignment. [Service Mode] → [System 2] → [Software Switch Setting] Functions •...
  • Page 370 Field Service Ver. 4.0 Jun. 2008 8. Utility Mode (10) Delete Job Log Functions • Clear the all job logs. Setting/ 1. Touch [Delete Job Log]. Procedure 2. Select [Yes] on the confirmation screen and touch [OK]. E. Enhanced Security Mode •...
  • Page 371 8. Utility Mode Field Service Ver. 4.0 Jun. 2008 Name of the function Default setting When Enhanced Security Mode is ON Network Setting Clear (PageScope Web Allow Restrict Connection) Administrator password change via network (Page- Allow Restrict (Cannot be changed) Scope Web Connection) Registering and Changing Allow...
  • Page 372 Field Service Ver. 4.0 Jun. 2008 8. Utility Mode (2) Overwrite Temporary Data • When the image becomes unnecessary, temporary data overwrite function will write meaningless data over all area where images are stored, and destroy the image data itself. The structure of image data will be destroyed so that in case HDD is stolen, the remain- ing data included in the image data will not leak.
  • Page 373 8. Utility Mode Field Service Ver. 4.0 Jun. 2008 (3) Overwrite All Data Functions • To delete the whole data in the hard disk by overwriting. • To initialize the area of use for the user stored in NVRAM. • To use when disposing of the hard disk. •...
  • Page 374 Field Service Ver. 4.0 Jun. 2008 8. Utility Mode (5) Format HDD Functions • To conduct logical formatting of HDD. • To initialize HDD. NOTE • It is subject to logical formatting here, therefore if starting with physical for- matting, follow as [Service Mode] → [State Confirmation] → [Memory/HDD Adj.] →...
  • Page 375 8. Utility Mode Field Service Ver. 4.0 Jun. 2008 G. Function Management Setting (1) Each Function Setting • It will be displayed only when the following setting shows that Vendor 2 or Management Device is mounted. [Service Mode] → [Billing Setting] → [Management Function Choice] Functions •...
  • Page 376 Field Service Ver. 4.0 Jun. 2008 8. Utility Mode (4) Authentication Time Setting • It will be displayed only when the following setting shows that authentication device 1 is mounted. [Service Mode] → [Billing Setting] → [Management Function Choice] Functions •...
  • Page 377 8. Utility Mode Field Service Ver. 4.0 Jun. 2008 Image Log Transfer Settings • It will be displayed when the following setting shows that switch No.63 is set to [01] at HEX assignment. [Service Mode] → [System 2] → [Software Switch Setting] Functions •...

  • Page 378: License Settings

    Field Service Ver. 4.0 Jun. 2008 8. Utility Mode 8.6.11 License Settings • This is displayed only when the function enhanced version 2 or later firmware is installed. A. Get Request Code Functions • To display and print a request code and serial number used to activate i-Option. •...

  • Page 379: My Panel Settings

    8. Utility Mode Field Service Ver. 4.0 Jun. 2008 My Panel Settings • This is displayed only when a registered user is logging in after user authentication. However, this is not displayed when both management device 2 and user authentication are used.
  • Page 380 Field Service Ver. 4.0 Jun. 2008 8. Utility Mode Blank Page...

  • Page 381: Adjustment Item List

    9. Adjustment item list Field Service Ver. 4.0 Jun. 2008 Adjustment item list Replacement part/Service job Adjustment/setting items Print Positioning: Leading Edge Printer ❍ Print Positioning: Side Edge Area Paper Feed Direction Adj. (5) (5) Image position: Leading Edge Image position: Side Edge Scan Machine Area...
  • Page 382 Field Service Ver. 4.0 Jun. 2008 9. Adjustment item list • This table shows the adjustment items that are required when a part of the machine has been replaced. Priority order, if applicable, during the adjustment procedures is indicated by the corresponding number in the parentheses. ❍...

  • Page 383: 10. Service Mode

    10. Service Mode Field Service Ver. 4.0 Jun. 2008 10. Service Mode 10.1 Service Mode function setting procedure NOTE • Ensure appropriate security for Service Mode function setting procedures. They should NEVER be shown to any unauthorized person not involved with service jobs.
  • Page 384 Field Service Ver. 4.0 Jun. 2008 10. Service Mode NOTE • Be sure to change the CE password from its default value. • For the procedure to change the CE password, see the Enhanced Security. See P.437 B. Exiting • Touch the [Exit] key. C.

  • Page 385: 10.2 Service Mode Function Tree

    10. Service Mode Field Service Ver. 4.0 Jun. 2008 10.2 Service Mode function tree ✽ The function tree is shown to comply with the format displayed on the screen. *1: Settings are available only when the optional fax kit (FK-502) is mounted. *2: It will be displayed only when the optional fax multi line (ML-501) is mounted.
  • Page 386 Field Service Ver. 4.0 Jun. 2008 10. Service Mode Service Mode Ref. Page Imaging Process Stabilizer Stabilization Only P.366 Adjustment Initialize+Image Stabilization P.367 Thick Paper Density Adjustment P.367 TCR Toner Supply P.367 Monochrome Density Adjustment P.368 Dev. Bias Choice P.368 CS Remote Care P.369 System 1...
  • Page 387 10. Service Mode Field Service Ver. 4.0 Jun. 2008 Service Mode Ref. Page Counter ADF Paper Pages P.407 Paper Jam History P.408 Fax Connection Error P.408 Split Line Counter P.408 ⎯ Counter Reset List Output Machine Management List P.409 Adjustments List P.409 Parameter List P.409...
  • Page 388 Field Service Ver. 4.0 Jun. 2008 10. Service Mode Service Mode Ref. Page Test Mode Gradation Pattern P.428 Halftone Pattern P.429 Lattice Pattern P.429 Solid Pattern P.430 Color Sample P.430 8 Color Solid Pattern P.431 CMM Pattern P.431 Running Mode P.431 Fax Test P.432...
  • Page 389 10. Service Mode Field Service Ver. 4.0 Jun. 2008 Service Mode Ref. Page Internet ISW Internet ISW Set P.433 HTTP Setting *6 P.433 FTP Setting *6 P.434 Forwarding Access Setting *6 P.435 Download *6 P.436...

  • Page 390: 10.3 Date/Time Input Mode

    Field Service Ver. 4.0 Jun. 2008 10. Service Mode 10.3 Date/Time Input mode • This mode is used to set time-of-day and date. 10.3.1 Date & Time Setting mode screen A00JF3E537DA A. Date & Time Setting mode setting procedure 1. Call the Service Mode to the screen. 2.

  • Page 391: 10.4 Machine

    10. Service Mode Field Service Ver. 4.0 Jun. 2008 10.4 Machine 10.4.1 Fusing Temperature Functions • To adjust individually the temperature of the heating roller and the fusing pressure roller for each type of paper, thereby coping with varying fusing performance under changing environmental conditions.

  • Page 392: Fusing Transport Speed

    1. Call the Service Mode to the screen. 2. Touch these keys in this order: [Machine] → [Fusing Transport Speed]. Procedure 3. Select the transport speed, at which the brush effect or blurred image has occurred. <bizhub C353> Transport speed Paper Setting 166.6 mm/s...

  • Page 393: Printer Area

    10. Service Mode Field Service Ver. 4.0 Jun. 2008 10.4.4 Printer Area A. Leading Edge Adjustment Functions • To vary the print start position in the sub scan direction for each of different paper types in the manual bypass tray. (To adjust the timing where paper is sent out from the timing roller) •...
  • Page 394 Field Service Ver. 4.0 Jun. 2008 10. Service Mode B. Centering Functions • To vary the print start position in the main scan direction for each paper source. • The PH Unit has been replaced. • A paper feed unit has been added. •...
  • Page 395 10. Service Mode Field Service Ver. 4.0 Jun. 2008 C. Leading Edge Adj. (Duplex Side 2) Functions • For individual types of paper, this function allows the adjustment of the image write start position in the sub scan direction on the 2nd side of duplex printing. •...
  • Page 396 Field Service Ver. 4.0 Jun. 2008 10. Service Mode D. Centering (Duplex 2nd Side) Functions • To vary the print start position in the main scan direction for each paper source in the 2-Sided mode. • The image on the backside of the 2-sided copy deviates in the main scan direction. Adjustment Width A •Width A on the test pattern produced should...
  • Page 397 10. Service Mode Field Service Ver. 4.0 Jun. 2008 E. Paper Feed Direction Adj. Functions • To synchronize the paper transport speed with the image writing speed. • Feed Direction Adjustment becomes necessary. • The print image on the copy distorts (stretched, shrunk). •...

  • Page 398: Scan Area

    Field Service Ver. 4.0 Jun. 2008 10. Service Mode 10.4.5 Scan Area • Use the following color chart for the adjustment of the scanner section. • If the color chart is not available, a scale may be used instead. • A: Image Position: Leading Edge COLOR CHART COLOR CHART •...
  • Page 399 10. Service Mode Field Service Ver. 4.0 Jun. 2008 B. Image Position: Side Edge Functions • To adjust part-to-part variations in accuracy of IR parts and their mounting accuracy by varying the scan start position in the main scan direction. •...
  • Page 400 Field Service Ver. 4.0 Jun. 2008 10. Service Mode C. Cross Direction Adjustment Functions • To adjust the zoom ratio in the main scan direction for the scanner section. • The CCD unit has been replaced. Adjustment •Measure C width on the color chart and on Specification the sample copy, and adjust the gap to be within the following specification.
  • Page 401 10. Service Mode Field Service Ver. 4.0 Jun. 2008 D. Feed Direction Adjustment Functions • To adjust the zoom ratio in the sub scan direction for the scanner section. • The scanner assy has been replaced. • The scanner motor has been replaced. •...

  • Page 402: Printer Resist Loop

    To decrease the loop amount: Decrease the setting value Instructions To increase the loop amount: Increase the setting value Adjustment • The adjustable range is different depending on paper source and processing speed. Range <bizhub C353> Tray 1/2 Tray 3/4 LCT Duplex Manual Tray 166.6 mm/sec...

  • Page 403: Color Registration Adjustment

    10. Service Mode Field Service Ver. 4.0 Jun. 2008 10.4.7 Color Registration Adjustment A. Cyan, Magenta, Yellow Functions • To adjust color shift if there is any when comparing the original with copy of the plain or thick paper. • To correct any color shift. •...

  • Page 404: Exhaust Fan Stop Delay

    Field Service Ver. 4.0 Jun. 2008 10. Service Mode 10.4.8 Exhaust Fan Stop Delay Functions • To set the period of time before the exhaust fan motor stops. • At the completion of a print job/image stabilization or at jam/malfunction, the fan motor rotating at full speed comes to a stop.
  • Page 405 10. Service Mode Field Service Ver. 4.0 Jun. 2008 B. LD lightness balance adjust. Functions • This function adjusts the LD lightness balance between the two LDs to correct the dif- ference of LD lightness between the LDs. • This setting is made after the PH unit or the service EEPROM board is replaced. •...

  • Page 406: Manual Bypass Tray Adjustment

    Field Service Ver. 4.0 Jun. 2008 10. Service Mode 10.4.10 Manual Bypass Tray Adjustment Functions • To set the maximum width and the minimum width for the manual bypass paper size unit of the manual bypass guide. • Use when the manual bypass paper size unit of the manual bypass guide has been changed.

  • Page 407: Split Line Prior Detection

    10. Service Mode Field Service Ver. 4.0 Jun. 2008 10.4.12 Split Line Prior Detection Functions • To check the stain on the ADF original glass and display the result. • To manually perform the pre-detection of the stain which is normally conducted when the main/sub power switch is turned ON, recovering from the sleep/low power mode, etc.
  • Page 408 Field Service Ver. 4.0 Jun. 2008 10. Service Mode Setting/ 1. Call the Service Mode to the screen. 2. Touch these keys in this order: [Image Process Adjustment] → [Gradation Adjust]. Procedure 3. Touch [Stabilizer] and the Start key to perform image stabilization. NOTE •...

  • Page 409: D Max Density

    10. Service Mode Field Service Ver. 4.0 Jun. 2008 10.6.2 D Max Density Functions • To adjust gradation, color, and image density to target reproduction levels by varying the maximum amount of toner sticking to paper through auxiliary manual fine-adjust- ment of gamma of each color after gradation adjust.

  • Page 410: Background Voltage Margin

    Field Service Ver. 4.0 Jun. 2008 10. Service Mode 10.6.4 Background Voltage Margin Functions • To adjust the highlight portion (fog level) to the target reproduction level by making an auxiliary manual fine-adjustment of γ of each color after gradation adjust. •...

  • Page 411: Stabilizer

    10. Service Mode Field Service Ver. 4.0 Jun. 2008 B. Secondary transfer adj. Functions • Adjust the 2nd image transfer output (ATVC) on the 1st page and the 2nd page for each paper type. • To use when the transfer failure at the trailing edge occurs. Adjustment •...

  • Page 412: Thick Paper Density Adjustment

    Field Service Ver. 4.0 Jun. 2008 10. Service Mode B. Initialize+Image Stabilization Functions • To carry out an image stabilization sequence after the historical data of image stabili- zation control has been initialized. • Use if an image problem persists even after gradation adjustment has been exe- cuted.

  • Page 413: Monochrome Density Adjustment

    10. Service Mode Field Service Ver. 4.0 Jun. 2008 10.6.9 Monochrome Density Adjustment Functions • To fine-adjust the density of the printed image for a black print. • To vary the density of the printed image of a black print. Adjustment •...

  • Page 414: 10.7 Cs Remote Care

    Field Service Ver. 4.0 Jun. 2008 10. Service Mode 10.7 CS Remote Care 10.7.1 Outlines • CS Remote Care enables the machine and the computer at CS Remote Care center to exchange data through telephone/fax line in order to control the machine. •...
  • Page 415 10. Service Mode Field Service Ver. 4.0 Jun. 2008 Procedure Step Using the telephone Using the Fax line Using E-mail line modem modem *1 Selecting the CS Selecting the CS Selecting the CS Remote Care function Select [Service Mode] → [CS Remote Care] → Remote Care function Remote Care function Select [Service Mode]...
  • Page 416 Field Service Ver. 4.0 Jun. 2008 10. Service Mode Procedure Step Using the telephone Using the Fax line Using E-mail line modem modem *1 Inputting the AT com- Proceed to step 12. Setting the E-mail address 1. Select [Service Mode] → [CS Remote Care], mand for initializing the modem and touch [Server Set].

  • Page 417: Software Sw Setting For Cs Remote Care

    10. Service Mode Field Service Ver. 4.0 Jun. 2008 10.7.3 Software SW setting for CS Remote Care NOTE • SW bits data are written into the NVRAM every time a change is made. In case you changed bit data by accident, be sure to restore the previous state. A.
  • Page 418 Field Service Ver. 4.0 Jun. 2008 10. Service Mode SW No. Functions Default SW 05 Modem redial interval 4 to 7 Reservation — — SW 06 Modem redial times Reservation — — SW 07 Redial for response time out Do not redial Redial 1 to 7 Reserved —...
  • Page 419 10. Service Mode Field Service Ver. 4.0 Jun. 2008 SW No. Functions Default SW 12 Timer 2 Dial request completed → CONNECT reception SW 13 0 to 7 Reservation — — SW 14 Timer 4 Line connection → Start request telegram delivery SW 15 Timer 5...
  • Page 420 Field Service Ver. 4.0 Jun. 2008 10. Service Mode *1: Baud rate Mode 01-7 01-6 01-5 01-4 9600 bps 19200 bps “38400 bps” *2: Modem redial interval Mode 05-3 05-2 05-1 05-0 1 minute 2 minutes “3 minutes” 4 minutes 5 minutes 6 minutes 7 minutes...
  • Page 421 10. Service Mode Field Service Ver. 4.0 Jun. 2008 *5: Retransmission times on e-mail delivery error Mode 09-6 09-5 09-4 09-3 09-2 09-1 09-0 0 to 9 times 000 0000 to 000 1001 “10 times” 11 to 99 times 000 1011 to 110 0011 *6: Timer 1 (RING reception →...

  • Page 422: Setup Confirmation

    Field Service Ver. 4.0 Jun. 2008 10. Service Mode 10.7.4 Setup confirmation • Follow the steps below to make sure that CS Remote Care has been properly set 1. Call the Service Mode to the screen. 2. Touch [CS Remote Care]. 3.

  • Page 423: Calling The Center From The Administrator

    10. Service Mode Field Service Ver. 4.0 Jun. 2008 10.7.6 Calling the center from the administrator • When the CS Remote Care setup is complete, the administrator can call the CS Remote Care center. 1. Select [Administrator Settings], and touch [System Connection]. 2.
  • Page 424 Field Service Ver. 4.0 Jun. 2008 10. Service Mode C. Detail Setting (1) Basic Setting Functions • Execute the primary setting. • Use to change the set contents. • Use to register the machine to the CS Remote Care center. Setting/ 1.
  • Page 425 10. Service Mode Field Service Ver. 4.0 Jun. 2008 (2) Date & Time Setting Functions • To set the data and time-of-day. • Use to set or change the date and time-of-day. Setting/ 1. Call the Service Mode to the screen. Procedure 2.
  • Page 426 Field Service Ver. 4.0 Jun. 2008 10. Service Mode D. AT Command Functions • To set the command to be issued at the time of modem initialization. • This setting is available only when [Modem] is selected for the system setting. •...
  • Page 427 10. Service Mode Field Service Ver. 4.0 Jun. 2008 (2) Receive <E-mail Address> Functions • To set the e-mail address used for the CS Remote Care. • To set the e-mail address. Setting/ • The default setting is No. Procedure •...
  • Page 428 Field Service Ver. 4.0 Jun. 2008 10. Service Mode <SMTP port number> Functions • To set the SMTP port number for transmission used for the CS Remote Care. • To set the Port Number of the SMTP Server. Setting/ • The default setting is 25. Procedure “25”...

  • Page 429: List Of The Cs Remote Care Error Code

    10. Service Mode Field Service Ver. 4.0 Jun. 2008 10.7.9 List of the CS Remote Care error code A. When connecting by modem Error code Error Solution 0001 The line is busy (Busy detection) • Transmit again manually. 0002 Failure of the Modem default setting at transmit- •...
  • Page 430 Field Service Ver. 4.0 Jun. 2008 10. Service Mode Error code Error Solution 001A Device ID inconsistency • Check device ID setting of the (Device ID of the host is not identical with the one main body side. of start request telegram.) •...
  • Page 431 10. Service Mode Field Service Ver. 4.0 Jun. 2008 B. When connecting by e-mails Error code Error Solution • Check the SMTP server on 0001 Connection timeout during transmission User side. Transmission error • Check the SMTP server on 0### ***: SMTP responding code (hexadecimal) User side.
  • Page 432 Field Service Ver. 4.0 Jun. 2008 10. Service Mode Error code Error Solution • Check the POP3 server 3008 POP3_DELETE_FAIL_ERR environment on user’s side. • Check the POP3 server envi- 3009 POP3_MAILBOX_FULL ronment on user’s side. Not ready • Tried to transmit or receive an e-mail when the •...

  • Page 433: Troubleshooting For Cs Remote Care

    10. Service Mode Field Service Ver. 4.0 Jun. 2008 10.7.10 Troubleshooting for CS Remote Care If communication is not done properly, check the condition by following the procedures shown below. 1. Shift the screen in the order of [Service Mode] → [CS Remote Care] → [Detail Setting]. At this time, in the cases of initial transmitting / administrator transmitting / maintenance start transmitting / maintenance finish transmitting, the communication result will be displayed at the top of the screen.

  • Page 434: System 1

    Field Service Ver. 4.0 Jun. 2008 10. Service Mode 10.8 System 1 10.8.1 Marketing Area Functions • To make the various settings (language, paper size, fixed zoom ratios, etc.) according to the applicable marketing area. • Upon setup. Setting/ <Marketing Area> Procedure •...

  • Page 435: Serial Number

    10. Service Mode Field Service Ver. 4.0 Jun. 2008 10.8.3 Serial Number Functions • To register the serial numbers of the machine and options. • The numbers will be printed on the list output. • To use the serial number as Machine ID during CS Remote Care communication. •...

  • Page 436: Install Date

    Field Service Ver. 4.0 Jun. 2008 10. Service Mode 10.8.7 Install Date Functions • To register the date the main body was installed. • Upon setup. Setting/ 1. Call the Service Mode on the screen. Procedure 2. Select the key as follows. [System 1] →...

  • Page 437: Trouble Isolation

    10. Service Mode Field Service Ver. 4.0 Jun. 2008 10.8.9 Trouble Isolation Functions • Individual units and options have a set or unset setting for the trouble isolation func- tion. • When a problem occurs, this function enables the continuous use of the units that are not affected by separately controlling them and isolating other units that have a prob- lem.

  • Page 438: Iu Life Setting

    Field Service Ver. 4.0 Jun. 2008 10. Service Mode 10.8.10 IU Life Setting Functions • To set the life threshold for imaging units. • Use this setting when a gap appears between the actual life value of imaging unit and the life specification value due to the way * a machine is used.

  • Page 439: Change Warm Up Time

    3 or mode 4. Other paper curl related failures include jam, paper ejection failure, and punch/staple/fold position failure. The following table shows the warm-up time (normal warm-up) in each mode. bizhub C353 bizhub C253/C203 Monochrome: 30 sec. Monochrome: 27 sec.

  • Page 440: Machine State Led Setting

    Field Service Ver. 4.0 Jun. 2008 10. Service Mode 10.8.12 Machine State LED Setting Functions • To set how to display main body statuses on the machine state LED (state display lamp, paper empty lamp). • Each of Type1 and Type2 has the following LED display forms. Machine State LED Setting Type1 Type2...

  • Page 441: System 2

    10. Service Mode Field Service Ver. 4.0 Jun. 2008 10.9 System 2 10.9.1 Functions • Not used. Setting/ Procedure 10.9.2 Image Controller Setting Functions • To set the type of the controller. • [Peripheral Mode] appears when [Others] is selected. •...

  • Page 442: Option Board Status

    Field Service Ver. 4.0 Jun. 2008 10. Service Mode 10.9.3 Option Board Status Functions • To set when the optional fax mount kit, scan accelerator is mounted. • Use when setting up the optional fax mount kit, scan accelerator is mounted. Setting/ •...

  • Page 443: Software Switch Setting

    10. Service Mode Field Service Ver. 4.0 Jun. 2008 10.9.6 Software Switch Setting Functions • To set the operating characteristic of each function from software switch depending on what types of printing are normally made. Setting/ 1. Touch [Software Switch Setting]. Procedure 2.

  • Page 444: Scan Caribration

    Field Service Ver. 4.0 Jun. 2008 10. Service Mode (3) Printing on paper of nonstandard size fed from the bypass tray (AnySize mode) • This function is available only when the function enhanced version 3 or later firmware is installed. Functions •...

  • Page 445: Line Mag Setting

    10. Service Mode Field Service Ver. 4.0 Jun. 2008 10.9.9 Line Mag Setting Functions • To set whether to use the offset value which has been set prior to the shipping. • To be used after replacing the CCD unit. After replacing the CCD unit, the default value needs to be set since the magnifica- tion offset value between the lines set for each unit changes to control the differences in reading performance on each scanner (CCD).
  • Page 446 Field Service Ver. 4.0 Jun. 2008 10. Service Mode Setting/ 5. Input the user name and the password. Procedure User name: capture Password: sysadm 4037F3E539DA 6. Using the “ls” command, display the list of the file available for capture. 4037F3E540DA 7.

  • Page 447: Split Line Detect. Setting

    10. Service Mode Field Service Ver. 4.0 Jun. 2008 Setting/ 8. Using the “get” command, transfer the data for capture to PC. Procedure 4037F3E542DA 9. Finish the command prompt. NOTE • After receiving capture data, select [Administrator Settings] → [Security Set- tings] →...

  • Page 448: Stamp

    Field Service Ver. 4.0 Jun. 2008 10. Service Mode B. Warning Level Functions • To set how to display the warning when stain on the ADF original glass is detected. • Use when changing the display of the warning which requests the cleaning of the stain on the glass detected by the pre-detection of the lines.

  • Page 449: Network Fax Settings

    10. Service Mode Field Service Ver. 4.0 Jun. 2008 10.9.13 Network Fax Settings Functions • To set whether or not to use network fax function. • To use network fax function (IP address fax, internet fax). • Selection will be available when each network fax function is set to “ON” in the follow- ing settings.

  • Page 450: 10.10 Counter

    Field Service Ver. 4.0 Jun. 2008 10. Service Mode 10.10 Counter • The counter displays the counts of various counters to allow the technical representative to check or set as necessary. 10.10.1 Procedure 1. Touch [Counter] to show the counter menu. 2.

  • Page 451: Jam

    10. Service Mode Field Service Ver. 4.0 Jun. 2008 Setting/ <3> Procedure • TCR new article detection (C) : Period of time over which the cyan toner cartridge has been used. • TCR new article detection (M) : Period of time over which the magenta toner car- tridge has been used.

  • Page 452: Maintenance

    Field Service Ver. 4.0 Jun. 2008 10. Service Mode 10.10.6 Maintenance Functions • To set a count value for maintenance of any given part. • When any given part is replaced. Setting/ Maint.-Set Procedure • Enter the maintenance counter value from the 10-key pad. •...

  • Page 453: 10.10.11 Paper Jam History

    10. Service Mode Field Service Ver. 4.0 Jun. 2008 10.10.11 Paper Jam History Functions • To display the jam history in chronological order. • Use to check the jam history in chronological order. NOTE • [Code] displayed on the screen of JAM history indicates JAM code. For details of JAM code, see “Trouble shooting.”...

  • Page 454: 10.11 List Output

    Field Service Ver. 4.0 Jun. 2008 10. Service Mode 10.11 List Output 10.11.1 Machine Management List Functions • To produce an output of a list of setting values, adjustment values, total counter val- ues, and others. • At the end of setup or when a malfunction occurs. Setting/ •...

  • Page 455: 10.12 State Confirmation

    10. Service Mode Field Service Ver. 4.0 Jun. 2008 10.12 State Confirmation 10.12.1 Sensor Check Functions • To display the states of the input ports of sensors and switches when the machine remains stationary. • Used for troubleshooting when a malfunction or a misfeed occurs. Setting/ •...

  • Page 456: Sensor Check Screens

    Field Service Ver. 4.0 Jun. 2008 10. Service Mode 10.12.2 Sensor check screens • These are only typical screens which may be different from what are shown on each indi- vidual machine. A. Sensor monitor (1) Sensor monitor 1, 2 A02EF3E521DB...
  • Page 457 10. Service Mode Field Service Ver. 4.0 Jun. 2008 (2) Sensor monitor 3, 4 A02EF3E522DB...
  • Page 458 Field Service Ver. 4.0 Jun. 2008 10. Service Mode (3) Sensor monitor 5, 6 A02EF3E523DB...
  • Page 459 10. Service Mode Field Service Ver. 4.0 Jun. 2008 (4) Sensor monitor 7 A02EF3E527DA...

  • Page 460: Sensor Check List

    Field Service Ver. 4.0 Jun. 2008 10. Service Mode 10.12.3 Sensor check list A. Sensor monitor (1) Sensor monitor 1 Operation characteris- tics/panel display Symbol Panel display Part/signal name Paper feed tray 1 device detection Out of Device detection In position sensor position Paper not...
  • Page 461 10. Service Mode Field Service Ver. 4.0 Jun. 2008 Operation characteris- tics/panel display Symbol Panel display Part/signal name PS18 Multi FD size 1 Manual multi FD size sensor/1 PS19 Multi FD size 2 Manual multi FD size sensor/2 PS20 Multi FD size 3 Manual multi FD size sensor/3 Lift-Up Position Paper not...
  • Page 462 Field Service Ver. 4.0 Jun. 2008 10. Service Mode (2) Sensor monitor 2 Operation characteris- tics/panel display Symbol Panel display Part/signal name Lift-Up Upper See P.23 of the PC-405 service manual. PS13 Lift-Up Lower PS12 Shift Tray Home PS11 Shift Tray Stop Paper feed Vertical Transport Paper empty...
  • Page 463 10. Service Mode Field Service Ver. 4.0 Jun. 2008 (3) Sensor monitor 3 Operation characteristics/ Symbol Panel display Part/signal name panel display Carrying Paper Passage See P.61 of the FS-519/PK-515/OT-602 service manual. Middle Paper Passage Home1 (CD-Align) Home2 (CD-Align) Elevate Tray Raised/ Lowered Shutter Front Cover...
  • Page 464 Field Service Ver. 4.0 Jun. 2008 10. Service Mode (4) Sensor monitor 4 Operation characteris- tics/panel display Symbol Panel display Part/Signal name PS20 Saddle exit See P.27 of the SD-505 service manual. PS22 Folding R home Middle guide PS24 Saddle guide —...
  • Page 465 10. Service Mode Field Service Ver. 4.0 Jun. 2008 (5) Sensor monitor 5 Operation characteris- tics/panel display Symbol Panel display Part/Signal name Exit (Non-sort 1) See P.16 of the JS-505 service manual. Exit (Non-sort 2) T1FDTB/ Full (Non-sort 1) T2FDTB/ Full (Non-sort 2) Front cover Route change...
  • Page 466 Field Service Ver. 4.0 Jun. 2008 10. Service Mode (6) Sensor monitor 6 Operation characteris- tics/panel display Symbol Panel display Part/Signal name Entrance See P.35 of the FS-609/PK-501 service manual. Paddle Home Bundle Roller Home Front Align Back Align Alignment Tray Home (Exit Belt) PS10 Crease Position...
  • Page 467 10. Service Mode Field Service Ver. 4.0 Jun. 2008 Operation characteris- tics/panel display Symbol Panel display Part/Signal name — Punch Timing See P.35 of the FS-609/PK-501 service manual. Punch Motor Clock Punch (Home) Punch Depth (Home) PS26 Horizontal Transport Door (7) Sensor monitor 7 Operation characteris- tics/panel display...

  • Page 468: Level History1

    Field Service Ver. 4.0 Jun. 2008 10. Service Mode 10.12.4 Table Number Functions • When IDC is detected, for plain paper, Thick 1, Thick, and Black, the machine inde- pendently displays each Vg/Vdc output value that is calculated based on the density (toner amount stuck on the belt) of the test pattern created on the transfer belt.

  • Page 469: Ccd Check

    10. Service Mode Field Service Ver. 4.0 Jun. 2008 10.12.8 CCD Check Functions • To display the D/A value of CCD clamp/gain for R, G, and B. • Used for troubleshooting for the CCD sensor. Setting/ • Use the following guidelines on the correct range of values. Procedure CLAMP: The difference between the max.
  • Page 470 Field Service Ver. 4.0 Jun. 2008 10. Service Mode C. JPEG check • This function is available only when the optional scan accelerator kit (SA-501) is mounted. Functions • This function enables you to check whether image data are compressed properly through the scan accelerator kit (SA-501).
  • Page 471 10. Service Mode Field Service Ver. 4.0 Jun. 2008 G. Down Ver. • This is displayed only when the function enhanced version 3 or later firmware is installed. Functions • In the process of firmware downgrade from the function enhanced version 3 firmware to the function enhanced version 2, use this function before rewriting the firmware.

  • Page 472: 10.12.10 Memory/Hdd State

    Field Service Ver. 4.0 Jun. 2008 10. Service Mode J. HDD Format Functions • To format the hard disk. • The function proceeds in the order of physical format to logical format. • If the hard disk is yet to be formatted, the malfunction code “C-D010” will appear. Ignore this code and continue with the formatting procedure.

  • Page 473: 10.12.12 Iu Lot No

    10. Service Mode Field Service Ver. 4.0 Jun. 2008 10.12.12 IU Lot No. Functions • To display the 10-digit lot number for each of Cyan, Magenta, Yellow, and Black IUs. • The lot number data is stored in EEPROM of each IU. •...

  • Page 474: Halftone Pattern

    Field Service Ver. 4.0 Jun. 2008 10. Service Mode 10.13.3 Halftone Pattern Functions • To produce a solid halftone pattern. • Used for checking uneven density and pitch noise. Pattern SINGLE HYPER Gradation Cyan Density: 255 A02EF3C519DA Setting/ • # of Print (“1” to 999) Procedure •...

  • Page 475: Solid Pattern

    10. Service Mode Field Service Ver. 4.0 Jun. 2008 10.13.5 Solid Pattern Functions • To produce each of the C, M, Y, and K solid patterns. • Used for checking reproducibility of image density. Pattern SINGLE HYPER Gradation Density: 255 A02EF3C512DA Setting/ •...

  • Page 476: Color Solid Pattern

    Field Service Ver. 4.0 Jun. 2008 10. Service Mode 10.13.7 8 Color Solid Pattern Functions • To produce an 8-color solid pattern. • Used for checking color reproducibility and uneven density of each color. Pattern SINGLE HYPER Gradation Density: 255 A02EF3C514DA Setting/ •...

  • Page 477: 10.13.10 Fax Test

    10. Service Mode Field Service Ver. 4.0 Jun. 2008 10.13.10 Fax Test • For details, see FK-502 Service Manual. 10.14 ADF See P.28 of the DF-611 service manual. 10.15 FAX • For details, see FK-502 Service Manual. 10.16 Finisher 10.16.1 CB-FN adjustment A.

  • Page 478: 10.17 Internet Isw

    Field Service Ver. 4.0 Jun. 2008 10. Service Mode 10.17 Internet ISW • By using this setting, the firmware stored in the server can be downloaded over internet for upgrading. • For details for upgrading the firmware, refer to “Firmware upgrade” in the Maintenance section.

  • Page 479: Ftp Setting

    10. Service Mode Field Service Ver. 4.0 Jun. 2008 D. Proxy Authentication Functions • To set the login name or password when authentication is necessary for accessing the proxy server. • To use when authentication is necessary for accessing the proxy server. Setting/ <Authentication>...

  • Page 480: Forwarding Access Setting

    Field Service Ver. 4.0 Jun. 2008 10. Service Mode D. Connection Setting Functions • To set the port No. and the time for timeout when accessing the FTP server, and also to set whether or not to enable PASV mode. •...

  • Page 481: Download

    10. Service Mode Field Service Ver. 4.0 Jun. 2008 10.17.5 Download Functions • Access the program server according to the Internet ISW setting, and download the firmware. • To use when updating the firmware via network. Setting/ 1. Select [Download]. Procedure 2.

  • Page 482: 11. Enhanced Security

    Field Service Ver. 4.0 Jun. 2008 11. Enhanced Security 11. Enhanced Security 11.1 Enhanced Security function setting procedure 11.1.1 Procedure 1. Call the Service Mode to the screen. 2. Press the following keys in this order. → → Stop Clear 3.

  • Page 483: 11.3 Settings In The Enhanced Security

    11. Enhanced Security Field Service Ver. 4.0 Jun. 2008 11.3 Settings in the Enhanced Security 11.3.1 CE Password Functions • To set and change the CE password. • Use to change the CE password. Setting/ • Enter the CE password (8 digits) on the on-screen keyboard. Procedure •...

  • Page 484: Administrator Feature Level

    Field Service Ver. 4.0 Jun. 2008 11. Enhanced Security 11.3.3 Administrator Feature Level Functions • To set which modes to be allowed for the administrator to use in Service Mode. • Use when allowing the administrator to use some modes in Service Mode. •...

  • Page 485: Nvram Data Backup

    11. Enhanced Security Field Service Ver. 4.0 Jun. 2008 11.3.6 NVRAM Data Backup Functions • To backup NVRAM data in the main body to the flash memory. • To backup current data in order to prevent data in NVRAM from being erased unex- pectedly.

  • Page 486: 12. Billing Setting

    Field Service Ver. 4.0 Jun. 2008 12. Billing Setting 12. Billing Setting 12.1 Billing Setting function setting procedure 12.1.1 Procedure 1. Call the Service Mode to the screen. 2. Press the following keys in this order. → Stop 3. Billing Setting menu will appear. A00JF3E536DB 12.1.2 Exiting...

  • Page 487: 12.3 Settings In The Billing Setting

    12. Billing Setting Field Service Ver. 4.0 Jun. 2008 12.3 Settings in the Billing Setting 12.3.1 Counter Setting Functions • To set the counting method for the total counter, size counter and long length paper counter. • To set the size regarded as the large size (2 counts.) •...
  • Page 488 Field Service Ver. 4.0 Jun. 2008 12. Billing Setting 12.3.2 Management Function Choice • To set whether or not the following items are to be mounted. Key Counter, Management Device (Data controller), Authentication Device, or Vendor NOTE • It will not be displayed when the following setting is set to “ON”. →...
  • Page 489 12. Billing Setting Field Service Ver. 4.0 Jun. 2008 (1) Installing method of the loadable device driver • The firmware is updated using the compact flash. NOTE • NEVER remove or insert the compact flash card with the machine power turned 1.
  • Page 490 Field Service Ver. 4.0 Jun. 2008 12. Billing Setting 7. Select [Yes] on the loadable device driver installation screen. A00JF3C543DA 8. Press the [START] to start installing the driver. (At this time, the Start key starts blinking red.) 9. Check that the control panel shows the message indicating that the data has been installed correctly ([Downloading Completed]).

  • Page 491: Counter Setting

    12. Billing Setting Field Service Ver. 4.0 Jun. 2008 D. Key Counter Only Functions • To set whether or not the key counter is installed. • Set when the key counter is mounted. • Select [Color Mode] and [Message] when the key counter is mounted. ✽...
  • Page 492 Field Service Ver. 4.0 Jun. 2008 12. Billing Setting E. Management Device 1 Functions • To set whether or not the management device 1 is installed. • Set when the management device 1 is mounted. Setting/ NOTE • The setting is available only when user authentication is set “OFF” and Procedure account track is set “Off”...
  • Page 493 12. Billing Setting Field Service Ver. 4.0 Jun. 2008 H. Vendor 2 Functions • To set whether or not the vendor 2 is installed. • Set when the vendor 2 is mounted. NOTE • When using the vendor along with the key counter, inserting the key counter will set it to the “Key Counter Mode”...
  • Page 494 Field Service Ver. 4.0 Jun. 2008 12. Billing Setting NOTE • Performing the setup for each unit to be mounted will internally change the setting values below. It needs resetting when cancelling the setting in order to set back to “not mounted”...

  • Page 495: Management Function Choice

    12. Billing Setting Field Service Ver. 4.0 Jun. 2008 Authentication Management Management Setting Item Vendor 2 Key Counter Device 1 Device 1 Device 2 ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ AppleTalk Setting Scan Setting, ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ SMB Setting Print Setting will be set to “OFF”.

  • Page 496: 13. Procedure For Resetting

    Field Service Ver. 4.0 Jun. 2008 13. Procedure for resetting 13. Procedure for resetting 13.1 Trouble resetting Functions • If the all troubles occur and the status would not be cleared by turning main power switch OFF and ON again, or opening and closing the front door, clear the status of the machine.

  • Page 497: 14. Mechanical Adjustment

    14. Mechanical adjustment Field Service Ver. 4.0 Jun. 2008 14. Mechanical adjustment 14.1 Mechanical adjustment of the scanner section 14.1.1 Adjustment of the scanner motor belt This adjustment must be made in the following case: • The scanner motor assy has been removed. •...

  • Page 498: Focus Positioning Of The Scanner And Mirrors Unit

    Field Service Ver. 4.0 Jun. 2008 14. Mechanical adjustment 14.1.2 Focus positioning of the scanner and mirrors unit This adjustment must be made in the following case: • The scanner drive cables have been rewound 1. Move the mirror unit [1] to the center and push it against the notches [2] on the rail.

  • Page 499: Scanner Position Adjustment

    14. Mechanical adjustment Field Service Ver. 4.0 Jun. 2008 14.1.3 Scanner position adjustment This adjustment must be made in the following case: • The scanner drive cables have been rewound. • Focus positioning of the scanner and mirrors unit must be completed. 1.

  • Page 500: Adjusting The Height Of The Original Glass Moving Unit

    Field Service Ver. 4.0 Jun. 2008 14. Mechanical adjustment 14.1.4 Adjusting the height of the original glass moving unit This adjustment must be made in the following case: • When replacing the original glass moving unit. 1. Set the height adjustment jig for the original glass moving unit [1].
  • Page 501 14. Mechanical adjustment Field Service Ver. 4.0 Jun. 2008 5. Remove four screws [1] from the original glass moving unit. A00JF3C013DA 6. Install four spacers [1] and make a height adjustment. A00JF3C014DA NOTE • Prepare and use the spacers described below as necessary. A00J 2903 ##: 0.5 mm thickness A00J 2908 ##: 0.2 mm thickness A00J 2909 ##: 0.1 mm thickness...

  • Page 502: Adjusting The Height Of The Guide Support For The Original Glass Moving Unit

    Field Service Ver. 4.0 Jun. 2008 14. Mechanical adjustment 7. Temporarily secure the original glass moving unit [2] with four screws [1]. 8. Check the height repeating step 1 to 9. Secure the original glass moving unit with four screws [1]. A00JF2C602DA 14.1.5 Adjusting the height of the guide support for the original glass moving unit...

  • Page 503: 14.2 Mechanical Adjustment Of The Paper Feed Section

    14. Mechanical adjustment Field Service Ver. 4.0 Jun. 2008 14.2 Mechanical adjustment of the paper feed section 14.2.1 Skew adjustment of the tray 1, 2 This adjustment must be made in the following case: • To reduce paper skew that cannot be corrected by the registration loop adjust- ment when the tray 1 or 2 is within the specifications.

  • Page 504: Centering Adjustment Of The Tray 1, 2

    Field Service Ver. 4.0 Jun. 2008 14. Mechanical adjustment 14.2.2 Centering adjustment of the tray 1, 2 This adjustment must be made in the following case: • When an image printed on a copy is displaced from the correct position with the use of the tray1/2.

  • Page 505: Adjustment Of The Manual Bypass Tray Paper Size Unit

    14. Mechanical adjustment Field Service Ver. 4.0 Jun. 2008 14.2.3 Adjustment of the manual bypass tray paper size unit This adjustment must be made in the following case: • The bypass paper size unit has been removed. 1. Align the match mark [1] on the bypass guide rack gear with the groove on the gear rim at two places and install two bypass guide rack...

  • Page 506: 14.3 Ph Unit Mechanical Adjustment

    Field Service Ver. 4.0 Jun. 2008 14. Mechanical adjustment 14.3 PH unit mechanical adjustment 14.3.1 Skew adjustment This adjustment must be made in the following case: • When PH unit is replaced. 1. Turn ON the main power switch. 2. Select [Service Mode] → [Test Mode] →...
  • Page 507 14. Mechanical adjustment Field Service Ver. 4.0 Jun. 2008 • If either value is out of the specifica- tion, follow the procedures shown below to adjust it to satisfy the specifi- cation. • If the value of all color, C, M, Y satisfy the specification, proceed to step 10.

  • Page 508: Troubleshooting

    Field Service Ver. 4.0 Jun. 2008 15. Jam display Troubleshooting 15. Jam display 15.1 Misfeed display • When a paper misfeed occurs, the misfeed message, misfeed location, and paper loca- tion are displayed on the control panel of the machine. A02EF4C501DA Display Code *1...
  • Page 509 15. Jam display Field Service Ver. 4.0 Jun. 2008 Display Code *1 Jam type Misfeed processing location Action [14] 3201 Misfeed at exit section Right door P.476 Misfeed at duplex transport [15] 9301 Duplex door P.477 section ⎯ ⎯ 9901 Controller jam P.478 7216...
  • Page 510 Field Service Ver. 4.0 Jun. 2008 15. Jam display A02EF4C502DA Display Code *1 Jam type Misfeed processing location Action 1501 See P.29 of the PC-405 service manual. 2001 7221 See P.37 of the SD-505 service manual. 7225 7284 7285 *1: JAM code is displayed at [Paper Jam History] under [Counter] available from Service Mode.
  • Page 511 15. Jam display Field Service Ver. 4.0 Jun. 2008 A02EF4C503DA Display Code *1 Jam type Misfeed processing location Action 7216 See P.19 of the JS-505 service manual. *1: JAM code is displayed at [Paper Jam History] under [Counter] available from Service Mode.

  • Page 512: Misfeed Display Resetting Procedure

    Field Service Ver. 4.0 Jun. 2008 15. Jam display A02EF4C539DA Display Code *1 Jam type Misfeed processing location Action 7218 See P.63 of the FS-609/PK-501 service manual. 7216 7225 7281 7221 *1: JAM code is displayed at [Paper Jam History] under [Counter] available from Service Mode.

  • Page 513: 15.2 Sensor Layout

    15. Jam display Field Service Ver. 4.0 Jun. 2008 15.2 Sensor layout A02EF4C504DA Paper exit sensor PS25 Sensor in front of tim. roller PS23 Duplex paper passage sensor/1 PS33 Paper feed tray 2 vertical PS16 transport sensor Duplex paper passage sensor/2 PS34 Paper feed tray 2 paper feed PS14 sensor...

  • Page 514: 15.3 Solution

    Field Service Ver. 4.0 Jun. 2008 15. Jam display 15.3 Solution 15.3.1 Initial check items • When a paper misfeed occurs, first perform the following initial check items. Check item Action Does paper meet product specifications? Replace paper. Is the paper curled, wavy, or damp? Replace paper.

  • Page 515: Misfeed At Tray 1 Feed Section

    15. Jam display Field Service Ver. 4.0 Jun. 2008 15.3.3 Misfeed at tray 1 feed section A. Detection timing Type Description Detection of • The leading edge of the paper does not turn ON the sensor in front of tim. roller misfeed at tray 1 (PS23) even after the lapse of a given period of time after the tray 1 starts to feed section...

  • Page 516: Misfeed At Tray 2 Feed Section

    Field Service Ver. 4.0 Jun. 2008 15. Jam display 15.3.4 Misfeed at tray 2 feed section A. Detection timing Type Description Detection of • The leading edge of the paper does not unblock the paper feed tray 2 vertical misfeed at tray 2 transport sensor (PS16) even after the lapse of a given period of time after the feed section tray 2 starts to feed paper.

  • Page 517: Misfeed At Manual Bypass Feed Section

    15. Jam display Field Service Ver. 4.0 Jun. 2008 15.3.5 Misfeed at manual bypass feed section A. Detection timing Type Description Detection of • The leading edge of the paper does not turn ON the sensor in front of tim. roller misfeed at manual (PS23) even after the lapse of a given period of time after the manual bypass bypass feed section...

  • Page 518: Misfeed At Duplex Pre-Registration Section

    Field Service Ver. 4.0 Jun. 2008 15. Jam display 15.3.6 Misfeed at duplex pre-registration section A. Detection timing Type Description Detection of • The leading edge of the paper does not turn ON the sensor in front of tim. roller misfeed at duplex (PS23) even after the lapse of a given period of time after a duplex paper feed pre-registration...

  • Page 519: Misfeed At Tray 2 Vertical Transport Section

    15. Jam display Field Service Ver. 4.0 Jun. 2008 15.3.7 Misfeed at tray 2 vertical transport section A. Detection timing Type Description • The leading edge of the paper does not turn ON the sensor in front of tim. roller Detection of (PS23) even after the lapse of a given period of time after the paper has misfeed at vertical...

  • Page 520: Misfeed At 2Nd Image Transfer Section

    Field Service Ver. 4.0 Jun. 2008 15. Jam display 15.3.8 Misfeed at 2nd image transfer section A. Detection timing Type Description • A sheet of paper does not turn OFF the sensor in front of tim. roller (PS23) after Detection of a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the sheet has turned ON the misfeed at 2nd PS23.

  • Page 521: Misfeed At Exit Section

    15. Jam display Field Service Ver. 4.0 Jun. 2008 15.3.9 Misfeed at exit section A. Detection timing Type Description • The paper exit sensor (PS25) is not turned OFF even after the lapse of a given period of time after the paper has turned ON the PS25. Detection of •...

  • Page 522: Misfeed At Duplex Transport Section

    Field Service Ver. 4.0 Jun. 2008 15. Jam display 15.3.10 Misfeed at duplex transport section A. Detection timing Type Description • A sheet of paper does not unblock the duplex paper passage sensor/2 (PS34) after a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the sheet blocks the duplex paper passage sensor/1 (PS33).

  • Page 523: Controller Jam

    15. Jam display Field Service Ver. 4.0 Jun. 2008 15.3.11 Controller jam A. Detection timing Type Description • A control erratic operation as it relates to the duplex unit occurs. Controller jam • A stop command (a command to effect a forced stop) is received. •...

  • Page 524: 16. Malfunction Code

    Field Service Ver. 4.0 Jun. 2008 16. Malfunction code 16. Malfunction code 16.1 Alert code • The machine’s CPU performs a self-diagnostics function that, on detecting a malfunction, gives the corresponding warning code and maintenance call mark on the control panel. •...

  • Page 525: Alert Code List

    16. Malfunction code Field Service Ver. 4.0 Jun. 2008 16.1.1 Alert code list • If an image stabilization or scanner fault occurs, the corresponding warning code appears. Code Item Description CCD gain adjustment failure • It is detected that the CCD clamp gain adjustment value is faulty.
  • Page 526 Field Service Ver. 4.0 Jun. 2008 16. Malfunction code Code Item Description P-22 Color regist adjust failure • The color shift amount is greater than the specified range during main scan direction registration correction. • The color shift amount is greater than the specified range during sub scan direction registration correction.

  • Page 527: 16.2 Solution

    16. Malfunction code Field Service Ver. 4.0 Jun. 2008 16.2 Solution 16.2.1 S-1: CCD gain adjustment failure Relevant parts Scanner assy CCD sensor unit Image processing board (IPB) Step Action Correct the harness connection between CCDB and IPB if faulty. Check for possible extraneous light and correct as necessary.

  • Page 528: P-5: Idc Sensor (Front) Failure

    Field Service Ver. 4.0 Jun. 2008 16. Malfunction code 16.2.4 P-5: IDC sensor (front) failure 16.2.5 P-28 IDC sensor (rear) failure Relevant parts IDC registration sensor/MK (IDCS/MK) Printer control board (PRCB) IDC registration sensor/YC (IDCS/YC) High voltage unit (HV) Transfer belt unit Step Action Wipe clean the surface of the transfer belt with a soft cloth, if it is dirty.

  • Page 529: P-21: Color Regist Test Pattern Failure

    16. Malfunction code Field Service Ver. 4.0 Jun. 2008 16.2.10 P-21: Color regist test pattern failure Relevant parts Transfer belt unit Printer control board (PRCB) PH unit Step Action Wipe clean the surface of the transfer belt with a soft cloth, if it is dirty. Change the image transfer belt unit if the transfer belt is damaged.

  • Page 530: P-30: Color Pc Drive Sensor Malfunction

    Field Service Ver. 4.0 Jun. 2008 16. Malfunction code 16.2.13 P-30: Color PC drive sensor malfunction Relevant electrical parts Color PC drive main sensor (PS27) Main drive unit Color PC drive sub sensor (PS28) Printer control board (PRCB) Step Action Perform the faulty sensor check procedure.

  • Page 531: 16.3 Trouble Code

    16. Malfunction code Field Service Ver. 4.0 Jun. 2008 16.3 Trouble code • The machine’s CPU performs a self-diagnostics function that, on detecting a malfunction, gives the corresponding malfunction code on the control panel. A02EF4E535DA 16.3.1 Trouble code list * For the details of the malfunction codes of the options, see the Service Manual for the cor- responding option.
  • Page 532 Field Service Ver. 4.0 Jun. 2008 16. Malfunction code Trouble iso- Code Item Detection timing lation com- Rank pliant unit C0211 Manual feed up/down • The manual lift-up position sensor is not abnormality unblocked even when the transport motor has turned for a given number of pulses after the sequence to move the paper lifting plate from the standby position to the feed position was started.
  • Page 533 16. Malfunction code Field Service Ver. 4.0 Jun. 2008 Trouble iso- Code Item Detection timing lation com- Rank pliant unit C11A3 Shutter drive failure See P.79 of the FS-519/PK-515/OT-602 ser- ⎯ vice manual. C11A4 Saddle exit motor failure See P.42 of the SD-505 service manual. ⎯...
  • Page 534 Field Service Ver. 4.0 Jun. 2008 16. Malfunction code Trouble iso- Code Item Detection timing lation com- Rank pliant unit C2152 Transfer belt pressure • During a retraction operation of the transfer welding alienation belt, the transfer belt retraction sensor can- not detect the transfer belt at its retracted position within a predetermined period of time after the transfer belt retraction clutch is...
  • Page 535 16. Malfunction code Field Service Ver. 4.0 Jun. 2008 Trouble iso- Code Item Detection timing lation com- Rank pliant unit C2554 Abnormally high toner • TC ratio in the developing machine, which is density detected magenta determined by toner replenishing amount TCR sensor control mechanism, is 11 % or more for a ⎯...
  • Page 536 Field Service Ver. 4.0 Jun. 2008 16. Malfunction code Trouble iso- Code Item Detection timing lation com- Rank pliant unit C2651 EEPROM access error • An error was found when reading or writing ⎯ (IU C) data. • The error was found when reading out the C2652 EEPROM access error ⎯...
  • Page 537 16. Malfunction code Field Service Ver. 4.0 Jun. 2008 Trouble iso- Code Item Detection timing lation com- Rank pliant unit C3421 Fusing heaters trouble • The temperature detected by the heating (heating side) roller thermistor/C does not reach a prede- termined level after the lapse of a predeter- mined period of time after the heating roller fusing heater lamp lights up.
  • Page 538 Field Service Ver. 4.0 Jun. 2008 16. Malfunction code Trouble iso- Code Item Detection timing lation com- Rank pliant unit C3823 Fusing abnormally low • The temperature of the pressure roller con- temperature detection tinues to be lower than a predetermined ⎯...
  • Page 539 16. Malfunction code Field Service Ver. 4.0 Jun. 2008 Trouble iso- Code Item Detection timing lation com- Rank pliant unit C6102 Drive system home • The scanner home sensor is unable to sensor malfunction detect the scanner located at its home posi- tion.
  • Page 540 Field Service Ver. 4.0 Jun. 2008 16. Malfunction code Trouble iso- Code Item Detection timing lation com- Rank pliant unit C8105 Undetectable ⎯ C8302 Read cooling fan trouble See P.60 of the DF-611 service manual. C9401 Exposure turning on the •...
  • Page 541 16. Malfunction code Field Service Ver. 4.0 Jun. 2008 Trouble iso- Code Item Detection timing lation com- Rank pliant unit CB116 FAX driver error: FAX See the FK-502 Service Manual. board nonresponse ⎯ (Nonresponse after initial- ization) CB117 FAX driver error: ACK ⎯...
  • Page 542 Field Service Ver. 4.0 Jun. 2008 16. Malfunction code Trouble iso- Code Item Detection timing lation com- Rank pliant unit CB141 I/F error with main: I/F See the FK-502 Service Manual. ⎯ error with driver CB142 I/F error with main: Unde- ⎯...
  • Page 543 16. Malfunction code Field Service Ver. 4.0 Jun. 2008 Trouble iso- Code Item Detection timing lation com- Rank pliant unit CB167 1 destination control: See the FK-502 Service Manual. ⎯ Deployment error of send- ing image information CB168 1 destination control: ⎯...
  • Page 544 Field Service Ver. 4.0 Jun. 2008 16. Malfunction code Trouble iso- Code Item Detection timing lation com- Rank pliant unit CC153 ROM contents error upon • A fault is detected in a sequence of ROM ⎯ startup (PRT) contents check of the mechanical control board (MFPB) during starting.
  • Page 545 16. Malfunction code Field Service Ver. 4.0 Jun. 2008 Trouble iso- Code Item Detection timing lation com- Rank pliant unit ⎯ CD005 Hard disk error 1 • Hard disk is faulty. ⎯ CD006 Hard disk error 2 ⎯ CD007 Hard disk error 3 ⎯...
  • Page 546 Field Service Ver. 4.0 Jun. 2008 16. Malfunction code Trouble iso- Code Item Detection timing lation com- Rank pliant unit CD252 No relay circuit boards for • Relay circuit boards (VI-504) are not ⎯ IC-409 mounting at IC- mounted when the IC-409 is set to mount 409 mount setting settting at Service Mode.
  • Page 547 16. Malfunction code Field Service Ver. 4.0 Jun. 2008 • The machine displays an abort code (CF###) on the control panel as it becomes unable to process tasks properly through its software control. • When the system program is aborted, check the electrical component, unit, option, and connection relating to the specific type of the abort condition.
  • Page 548 Field Service Ver. 4.0 Jun. 2008 16. Malfunction code Relevant electrical Code Item components, units, and Rank options CF131 Image transfer mal- • MFP board (MFPB) Print TIME OUT functions CF201 startIRReadAnd An exceptional Compress()Sequence instance occurred due to the unex- CF202 startWorkSave()Sequence pected parameter in abnormal...
  • Page 549 16. Malfunction code Field Service Ver. 4.0 Jun. 2008 Relevant electrical Code Item components, units, and Rank options CF520 Framing error Communication error • MFP board (MFPB) (IR detected) CF530 Parity error + Framing error CF540 Overrun error CF550 Parity error + Overrun error CF560 Overrun error + Framing error CF570 Parity error + Overrun error + Framing error...
  • Page 550 Field Service Ver. 4.0 Jun. 2008 16. Malfunction code Relevant electrical Code Item components, units, and Rank options CF806 SIO sending port...IRC • MFP board (MFPB) CF807 SIO sending port...ADF CF812 SIO sending port...Fiery • External controller I/F board CF815 SIO sending port...PIC/PIC terminal •...
  • Page 551 16. Malfunction code Field Service Ver. 4.0 Jun. 2008 Relevant electrical Code Item components, units, and Rank options CFB00 ASIC117 first sheet DMA00 • MFP board (MFPB) CFB01 ASIC117 first sheet DMA01 CFB02 ASIC117 first sheet DMA02 CFB03 ASIC117 first sheet DMA03 CFB04 ASIC117 first sheet DMA04 CFB05 ASIC117 first sheet DMA05 CFB06 ASIC117 first sheet DMA06...
  • Page 552 Field Service Ver. 4.0 Jun. 2008 16. Malfunction code Relevant electrical Code Item components, units, and Rank options CFB33 ASIC117 second sheet DMA19 • External controller I/F board CFB34 ASIC117 second sheet DMA20 CFB35 ASIC117 second sheet DMA21 CFB36 ASIC117 second sheet DMA22 CFB37 ASIC117 second sheet DMA23 CFB38 ASIC117 second sheet DMA24 CFB39 ASIC117 second sheet DMA25...
  • Page 553 16. Malfunction code Field Service Ver. 4.0 Jun. 2008 Relevant electrical Code Item components, units, and Rank options CFC10 ASIC117 first sheet DMA16 error interruption • MFP board (MFPB) CFC11 ASIC117 first sheet DMA17 error interruption CFC12 ASIC117 first sheet DMA18 error interruption CFC13 ASIC117 first sheet DMA19 error interruption CFC14 ASIC117 first sheet DMA20 error interruption CFC15 ASIC117 first sheet DMA21 error interruption...
  • Page 554 Field Service Ver. 4.0 Jun. 2008 16. Malfunction code Relevant electrical Code Item components, units, and Rank options CFC52 ASIC117 second sheet DMA02 error interruption • External controller I/F board CFC53 ASIC117 second sheet DMA03 error interruption CFC54 ASIC117 second sheet DMA04 error interruption CFC55 ASIC117 second sheet DMA05 error interruption CFC56 ASIC117 second sheet DMA06 error interruption CFC57 ASIC117 second sheet DMA07 error interruption...
  • Page 555 16. Malfunction code Field Service Ver. 4.0 Jun. 2008 Relevant electrical Code Item components, units, and Rank options CFC7B ASIC117 second unknown marker detected at JBIG • External controller I/F core board CFC7C ASIC117 second SC count overflow detected at JBIG core CFC7D ASIC117 second sheet master read data parity error CFC7E ASIC117 second sheet master write data parity error...
  • Page 556 Field Service Ver. 4.0 Jun. 2008 16. Malfunction code Relevant electrical Code Item components, units, and Rank options CFCB4 ASIC7 forced suspension • JPEG board CFCB5 ASIC7 PCI master detects retry error CFCB6 ASIC7 master read data parity error CFCB7 ASIC7 master write data parity error CFCB8 ASIC7 system error CFCB9 ASIC7 sleep read data parity error CFCBA ASIC7 sleep write data parity error...
  • Page 557 16. Malfunction code Field Service Ver. 4.0 Jun. 2008 Relevant electrical Code Item components, units, and Rank options CFD1D ASIC117 first sheet DMA29 time out • MFP board (MFPB) CFD1E ASIC117 first sheet DMA30 time out CFD50 ASIC117 second sheet DMA00 time out •...
  • Page 558 Field Service Ver. 4.0 Jun. 2008 16. Malfunction code Relevant electrical Code Item components, units, and Rank options CFE09 ASIC117 first sheet DMA09 time out • MFP board (MFPB) CFE0A ASIC117 first sheet DMA10 time out CFE10 ASIC117 first sheet DMA16 time out CFE11 ASIC117 first sheet DMA17 time out CFE12 ASIC117 first sheet DMA18 time out CFE13 ASIC117 first sheet DMA19 time out...
  • Page 559 16. Malfunction code Field Service Ver. 4.0 Jun. 2008 Relevant electrical Code Item components, units, and Rank options CFE6C ASIC117 second sheet DMA28 time out • External controller I/F board CFE6D ASIC117 second sheet DMA29 time out CFE6E ASIC117 second sheet DMA30 time out CFEA0 ASIC7 DMA_A time out •...

  • Page 560: 16.4 How To Reset

    Field Service Ver. 4.0 Jun. 2008 16. Malfunction code Relevant electrical Code Item components, units, and Rank options CFF58 ASIC117 second sheet DMA08 time out • External controller I/F board CFF59 ASIC117 second sheet DMA09 time out CFF5A ASIC117 second sheet DMA10 time out CFF60 ASIC117 second sheet DMA16 time out CFF61 ASIC117 second sheet DMA17 time out CFF62 ASIC117 second sheet DMA18 time out...

  • Page 561: 16.5 Solution

    16. Malfunction code Field Service Ver. 4.0 Jun. 2008 16.5 Solution 16.5.1 C0202: Tray 1 feeder up/down abnormality Relevant parts Paper feed tray 1 lift-up motor (M8) Printer control board (PRCB) Paper feed tray 1 upper limit sensor (PS8) WIRING DIAGRAM Step Action Location (Electri-...

  • Page 562: C0211: Manual Feed Up/Down Abnormality

    Field Service Ver. 4.0 Jun. 2008 16. Malfunction code 16.5.3 C0211: Manual feed up/down abnormality Relevant parts Transport motor (M1) Printer control board (PRCB) Manual pick-up solenoid (SL1) Manual lift-up position sensor (PS17) WIRING DIAGRAM Step Action Location (Electri- Control signal cal component) Check the M1 connector for proper connec- —...

  • Page 563: C2151: Secondary Transfer Roller Pressure Welding Alienation

    16. Malfunction code Field Service Ver. 4.0 Jun. 2008 16.5.5 C2151: Secondary transfer roller pressure welding alienation Relevant parts 2nd image transfer retraction motor (M11) Printer control board (PRCB) 2nd image transfer welding alienation sensor (PS36) WIRING DIAGRAM Step Action Location (Electri- Control signal cal component)

  • Page 564: C2164: Pc Charge Malfunction

    Field Service Ver. 4.0 Jun. 2008 16. Malfunction code 16.5.7 C2164: PC charge malfunction Relevant parts Imaging unit High voltage unit (HV) Printer control board (PRCB) WIRING DIAGRAM Step Action Location (Electri- Control signal cal component) Check the imaging unit for proper —...

  • Page 565: C225D: Color Dev. Unit Engagement/Disengagement Failure

    16. Malfunction code Field Service Ver. 4.0 Jun. 2008 16.5.10 C225D: Color dev. unit engagement/disengagement failure Relevant parts Color dev. unit engaged motor (M10) Printer control board (PRCB) Color dev. unit engaged position sensor (PS26) WIRING DIAGRAM Step Action Location (Electri- Control signal cal component) Check the M10 connector for proper...

  • Page 566: C2451: Release New Transfer Belt Unit

    Field Service Ver. 4.0 Jun. 2008 16. Malfunction code 16.5.12 C2451: Release new transfer belt unit Relevant parts Transfer belt unit Printer control board (PRCB) WIRING DIAGRAM Step Action Location (Electri- Control signal cal component) Reinstall unit — — Check there is a short circuit in the fuse of —...

  • Page 567: C2552: Abnormally High Toner Density Detected Cyan Tcr Sensor

    16. Malfunction code Field Service Ver. 4.0 Jun. 2008 16.5.16 C2552: Abnormally high toner density detected cyan TCR sensor 16.5.17 C2554: Abnormally high toner density detected magenta TCR sensor 16.5.18 C2556: Abnormally high toner density detected yellow TCR sensor Relevant parts Imaging unit /C Printer control board (PRCB) Imaging unit /M...

  • Page 568: C2558: Abnormally High Toner Density Detected Black Tcr Sensor

    Field Service Ver. 4.0 Jun. 2008 16. Malfunction code 16.5.20 C2558: Abnormally high toner density detected black TCR sensor Relevant parts Imaging unit /K Printer control board (PRCB) Toner cartridge /K WIRING DIAGRAM Step Action Location (Electri- Control signal cal component) Reinstall imaging unit —...

  • Page 569: C2650: Main Backup Media Access Error

    16. Malfunction code Field Service Ver. 4.0 Jun. 2008 16.5.25 C2650: Main backup media access error Relevant parts Service EEPROM board (SV ERB) Printer control board (PRCB) WIRING DIAGRAM Step Action Location (Electri- Control signal cal component) Check the connector (CN23PRCB) on PRCB, the connector (CN1SV ERB) on SV ERB, and the harness between the boards —...

  • Page 570: C2651: Eeprom Access Error (Iu C)

    Field Service Ver. 4.0 Jun. 2008 16. Malfunction code 16.5.26 C2651: EEPROM access error (IU C) 16.5.27 C2652: EEPROM access error (IU M) 16.5.28 C2653: EEPROM access error (IU Y) 16.5.29 C2654: EEPROM access error (IU K) Relevant parts Imaging unit /C Printer control board (PRCB) Imaging unit /M Imaging unit /Y...

  • Page 571: C3101: Fusing Roller Separation Failure

    16. Malfunction code Field Service Ver. 4.0 Jun. 2008 16.5.34 C3101: Fusing roller separation failure Relevant parts Fusing retraction motor (M12) Printer control board (PRCB) Fusing roller retraction sensor (PS38) Fusing unit WIRING DIAGRAM Step Action Location (Electri- Control signal cal component) Check the M12 connector for proper —...

  • Page 572: C3301: Fusing Cooling Fan Motor/ 1 Failure To Turn

    Field Service Ver. 4.0 Jun. 2008 16. Malfunction code 16.5.37 C3301: Fusing cooling fan motor/ 1 failure to turn Relevant parts Paper cooling fan motor (FM7) Printer control board (PRCB) WIRING DIAGRAM Step Action Location (Electri- Control signal cal component) Check the FM7 connector for proper —...

  • Page 573: C3421: Fusing Heaters Trouble (Heating Side)

    16. Malfunction code Field Service Ver. 4.0 Jun. 2008 16.5.39 C3421: Fusing heaters trouble (heating side) 16.5.40 C3423: Fusing heaters trouble (pressurizing side) Relevant parts Fusing unit DC power supply (DCPU) Printer control board (PRCB) WIRING DIAGRAM Step Action Location (Electri- Control signal cal component) Check the fusing unit for correct installation...

  • Page 574: C3721: Fusing Abnormally High Temperature Detection (Heating Side)

    Field Service Ver. 4.0 Jun. 2008 16. Malfunction code 16.5.42 C3721: Fusing abnormally high temperature detection (heating side) 16.5.43 C3723: Fusing abnormally high temperature detection (pressurizing side) Relevant parts Fusing unit DC power supply (DCPU) Printer control board (PRCB) WIRING DIAGRAM Step Action Location (Electri-...

  • Page 575: C4151: Polygon Motor Rotation Trouble (C)

    16. Malfunction code Field Service Ver. 4.0 Jun. 2008 16.5.46 C4151: Polygon motor rotation trouble (C) 16.5.47 C4152: Polygon motor rotation trouble (M) 16.5.48 C4153: Polygon motor rotation trouble (Y) 16.5.49 C4154: Polygon motor rotation trouble (K) Relevant parts PH unit PH relay board (REYB/PH) Printer control board (PRCB) WIRING DIAGRAM...

  • Page 576: C5102: Transport Motor's Failure To Turn

    Field Service Ver. 4.0 Jun. 2008 16. Malfunction code 16.5.54 C5102: Transport motor’s failure to turn 16.5.55 C5103: Transport motor’s turning at abnormal timing Relevant parts Transport motor (M1) Printer control board (PRCB) WIRING DIAGRAM Step Action Location (Electri- Control signal cal component) Check the M1 connector for proper —...

  • Page 577: C5353: Cooling Fan Motor/2'S Failure To Turn

    16. Malfunction code Field Service Ver. 4.0 Jun. 2008 16.5.57 C5353: Cooling fan motor/2’s failure to turn Relevant parts Cooling fan motor/2 (FM2) Printer control board (PRCB) WIRING DIAGRAM Step Action Location (Electri- Control signal cal component) Check the FM2 connector for proper —...

  • Page 578: C5357: Cooling Fan Motor/1'S Failure To Turn

    Field Service Ver. 4.0 Jun. 2008 16. Malfunction code 16.5.59 C5357: Cooling fan motor/1’s failure to turn Relevant parts Cooling fan motor/1 (FM1) Printer control board (PRCB) WIRING DIAGRAM Step Action Location (Electri- Control signal cal component) Check the FM1 connector for proper —...

  • Page 579: C5371: Mfp Board Cpu Cooling Fan Motor's Failure To Turn

    16. Malfunction code Field Service Ver. 4.0 Jun. 2008 16.5.61 C5371: MFP board CPU cooling fan motor’s failure to turn Relevant parts MFP board CPU cooling fan motor MFP board (MFPB) WIRING DIAGRAM Step Action Location (Electri- Control signal cal component) Check the MFP board CPU cooling fan motor connector for proper connection and —...

  • Page 580: C6301: Optical Cooling Fan Motor's Failure To Turn

    Field Service Ver. 4.0 Jun. 2008 16. Malfunction code 16.5.64 C6301: Optical cooling fan motor’s failure to turn Relevant parts Optical cooling fan motor (FM201) Scanner relay board (REYB/SCAN) Image processing board (IPB) WIRING DIAGRAM Step Action Location (Electri- Control signal cal component) Check the FM201 connector for proper —...

  • Page 581: C6751: Ccd Clamp/Gain Adjustment Failure

    16. Malfunction code Field Service Ver. 4.0 Jun. 2008 16.5.66 C6751: CCD clamp/gain adjustment failure Relevant parts Scanner assy CCD sensor unit Image processing board (IPB) WIRING DIAGRAM Step Action Location (Electri- Control signal cal component) Correct the harness connection between —...

  • Page 582: C9401: Exposure Turning On The Lamp Trouble Detection

    Field Service Ver. 4.0 Jun. 2008 16. Malfunction code 16.5.68 C9401: Exposure turning on the lamp trouble detection 16.5.69 C9402: Exposure turning on the lamp abnormally detection Relevant parts Scanner assy Inverter board (INVB) Flat cable CCD board (CCDB) Scanner relay board (REYB/SCAN) Image processing board (IPB) WIRING DIAGRAM Step...
  • Page 583 16. Malfunction code Field Service Ver. 4.0 Jun. 2008 16.5.73 CC001: Vendor connection failure Relevant parts Printer control board (PRCB) Coin vendor (Japan) Coin vendor kit (North America, Europe) WIRING DIAGRAM Step Action Location (Electri- Control signal cal component) Check the vendor connector for proper —...
  • Page 584 Field Service Ver. 4.0 Jun. 2008 16. Malfunction code 16.5.77 CC163: ROM contents error (PRT) Relevant parts Service EEPROM board (SV ERB) Printer control board (PRCB) WIRING DIAGRAM Step Action Location (Electri- Control signal cal component) Rewrite the firmware. — —...
  • Page 585 16. Malfunction code Field Service Ver. 4.0 Jun. 2008 16.5.78 CC164: ROM contents error (MSC) Relevant parts Printer control board (PRCB) MFP board (MFPB) WIRING DIAGRAM Step Action Location (Electri- Control signal cal component) Check the ROM version. — — Rewrite the firmware.
  • Page 586 Field Service Ver. 4.0 Jun. 2008 16. Malfunction code 16.5.89 CD002: JOB RAM save error Relevant parts MFP board (MFPB) Hard disk WIRING DIAGRAM Step Action Location (Electri- Control signal cal component) Check the hard disk connector for proper — —...
  • Page 587 16. Malfunction code Field Service Ver. 4.0 Jun. 2008 16.5.103 CD010: Hard disk unformat Relevant parts MFP board (MFPB) Hard disk WIRING DIAGRAM Step Action Location (Electri- Control signal cal component) Select [Service Mode] → [State Confirma- tion] → [Memory/HDD Adj.] → [HDD For- —...

  • Page 588: 16.5.108 Cd211: Pci-Sdram Dma Operation Failure

    Field Service Ver. 4.0 Jun. 2008 16. Malfunction code 16.5.108 CD211: PCI-SDRAM DMA operation failure 16.5.109 CD212: Compression/extraction timeout detection Relevant parts MFP board (MFPB) WIRING DIAGRAM Step Action Location (Electri- Control Signal cal Component) Change MFPB. — — 16.5.110 CD231: No Fax memory at FAX board mounting Relevant parts MFP board (MFPB) FAX board...

  • Page 589: 16.5.113 Cd251: No Jpeg Board Mounting At Jpeg Board Mount Setting

    16. Malfunction code Field Service Ver. 4.0 Jun. 2008 16.5.113 CD251: No JPEG board mounting at JPEG board mount setting Relevant parts MFP board (MFPB) JPEG board (SA-501) WIRING DIAGRAM Step Action Location (Electri- Control Signal cal Component) Check the JPEG board connector for proper connection and correct as neces- —...

  • Page 590: 16.5.116 Cd271: I-Option Activated And Additional Memory Not Installed

    Field Service Ver. 4.0 Jun. 2008 16. Malfunction code 16.5.116 CD271: i-Option activated and additional memory not installed Relevant parts MFP board (MFPB) Memory for i-Option WIRING DIAGRAM Step Action Location (Electri- Control Signal cal Component) Check the memory for proper connection —...

  • Page 591: 16.5.124 Ce001: Abnormal Message Queue

    16. Malfunction code Field Service Ver. 4.0 Jun. 2008 16.5.124 CE001: Abnormal message queue 16.5.125 CE003: Task error 16.5.126 CE004: Event error 16.5.127 CE005: Memory access error 16.5.128 CE006: Header access error 16.5.129 CE007: DIMM initialize error Relevant parts MFP board (MFPB) WIRING DIAGRAM Step Action...

  • Page 592: 16.5.130 Cd3##: Nvram Data Error

    Field Service Ver. 4.0 Jun. 2008 16. Malfunction code 16.5.130 CD3##: NVRAM data error • When the data stored due to the NVRAM trouble is lost, backup data can be used for res- toration. • Trouble code [C-D370] will be displayed when multiple errors (over 5) of NVRAM data are detected, which can be restored with one restoration command.

  • Page 593: 16.5.131 Ce002: Message And Method Parameter Failure

    16. Malfunction code Field Service Ver. 4.0 Jun. 2008 16.5.131 CE002: Message and method parameter failure Relevant parts MFP board (MFPB) Hard disk WIRING DIAGRAM Step Action Location (Electri- Control signal cal component) If it occurred after upgrading the firmware, conduct the following setting.

  • Page 594: 16.5.134 Ceee3: Engine Section Undefined Malfunction

    Field Service Ver. 4.0 Jun. 2008 16. Malfunction code 16.5.134 CEEE3: Engine section undefined malfunction Relevant parts Printer control board (PRCB) WIRING DIAGRAM Step Action Location (Electri- Control signal cal component) Check the PRCB connector for proper — — connection and correct as necessary. Change PRCB —...

  • Page 595: 17. Power Supply Trouble

    17. Power supply trouble Field Service Ver. 4.0 Jun. 2008 17. Power supply trouble 17.1 Machine is not energized at all (DCPU operation check) Relevant parts Main power switch (S1) DC power supply (DCPU) Front door switch/1 (S3) Front door switch/2 (S4) Printer control board (PRCB) WIRING Step...

  • Page 596: 17.3 Fusing Heaters Do Not Operate

    Field Service Ver. 4.0 Jun. 2008 17. Power supply trouble 17.3 Fusing heaters do not operate Relevant parts Main power switch (S1) DC power supply (DCPU) Right door switch (S5) Fusing unit WIRING Step Check item DIAGRAM Result Action (Location) Is the power source voltage applied across CN7-5 on DCPU? Check wiring from power...
  • Page 597 17. Power supply trouble Field Service Ver. 4.0 Jun. 2008 17.4.3 FS-519/JS-505/FS-609 WIRING Step Check item DIAGRAM Result Action (Location) Malfunction in FS-519/ Are DC24 V being applied to CN78L-1? J-18 JS-505/FS-609 Are DC24 V being applied to CN4-1 on Check wiring from DCPU DCPU? to FS-519/JS-505/FS-609.

  • Page 598: 18. Image Quality Problem

    Field Service Ver. 4.0 Jun. 2008 18. Image quality problem 18. Image quality problem 18.1 How to read element date • As part of troubleshooting procedures, the numeric values set for “State Confirmation” available from “Service Mode” can be used to isolate the cause of the image problem. A00JF4E513DA...
  • Page 599 18. Image quality problem Field Service Ver. 4.0 Jun. 2008 18.1.1 Table number A02EF4E536DA Vdc-C • Shows the developing bias value of each color of toner when an image is produced. Vdc-M • Standard values: around 100 to 800 V Vdc-Y •...

  • Page 600: Level History 1

    Field Service Ver. 4.0 Jun. 2008 18. Image quality problem 18.1.2 Level history 1 A02EF4E537DA TCR-C • Shows the T/C ratio reading taken last (in 0.01 % increments). TCR-M • Standard value: 6 to 8 % TCR-Y • Relevant components: TCR sensor TCR-K •...

  • Page 601: Level History 2

    18. Image quality problem Field Service Ver. 4.0 Jun. 2008 18.1.3 Level history 2 A02EF4E538DA IDC Sensor Adjust 1 • Shows the IDC intensity adjustment value. IDC Sensor Adjust 2 • It should normally be around 40 and can range from 0 to 255. •...

  • Page 602: 18.2 How To Identify Problematic Part

    Field Service Ver. 4.0 Jun. 2008 18. Image quality problem 18.2 How to identify problematic part • This chapter is divided into two parts: “Initial check items” and “Troubleshooting proce- dure by a particular image quality problem.” • When an image quality problem occurs, first go through the “Initial check items” and, if the cause is yet to be identified, go to “Troubleshooting procedure by a particular image quality problem.”...

  • Page 603: Initial Check Items

    18. Image quality problem Field Service Ver. 4.0 Jun. 2008 C. Initial check items 3 • If the printer is responsible for the image problem, let the machine produce a test print and determine whether the image problem occurs in a specific single color or four colors 4 colors Mono color A02EF4C531DA...

  • Page 604: 18.3 Solution

    Field Service Ver. 4.0 Jun. 2008 18. Image quality problem 18.3 Solution NOTE • Typical faulty image samples shown in the following are all printed with A4S set- ting. 18.3.1 Scanner system: white lines in sub scan direction, white bands in sub scan direction, colored lines in sub scan direction, and colored bands in sub scan direction A.
  • Page 605 18. Image quality problem Field Service Ver. 4.0 Jun. 2008 (2) When the ADF is used Step Section Check item Result Action Original Original is damaged or dirty. Change original. ADF reading section Glass is dirty. Clean. ADF scanning guide ADF scanning guide is damaged Clean.

  • Page 606: Scanner System: White Lines In Main Scan Direction, White Bands In Main Scan Direction, Colored Lines In Main Scan Direction, And Colored Bands In Main Scan Direction

    Field Service Ver. 4.0 Jun. 2008 18. Image quality problem 18.3.2 Scanner system: white lines in main scan direction, white bands in main scan direction, colored lines in main scan direction, and colored bands in main scan direction A. Typical faulty images White lines in main White bands in main Color lines in main...

  • Page 607: Scanner System: Color Spots

    18. Image quality problem Field Service Ver. 4.0 Jun. 2008 18.3.3 Scanner system: color spots A. Typical faulty images A02EF4C509DA B. Troubleshooting procedure Step Section Check item Result Action Original Original is damaged or dirty. YES Change original. Original pad is dirty. YES Clean.

  • Page 608: Scanner System: Fog

    Field Service Ver. 4.0 Jun. 2008 18. Image quality problem 18.3.4 Scanner system: fog A. Typical faulty images ABCD ABCD ABCD ABCD ABCD A02EF4C510DA B. Troubleshooting procedure Step Section Check item Result Action Original Original is damaged or dirty. YES Change original. Original pad is dirty.

  • Page 609: Scanner System: Blurred Image, Blotchy Image

    18. Image quality problem Field Service Ver. 4.0 Jun. 2008 18.3.5 Scanner system: blurred image, blotchy image A. Typical faulty images A02EF4C511DA B. Troubleshooting procedure Step Section Check item Result Action Original Original does not lie flat. YES Change original. ADF does not lie flat.

  • Page 610: Scanner System: Incorrect Color Image Registration, Sync Shift

    Field Service Ver. 4.0 Jun. 2008 18. Image quality problem 18.3.6 Scanner system: incorrect color image registration, sync shift (lines in main scan direction) A. Typical faulty images A02EF4C512DA B. Troubleshooting procedure Step Section Check item Result Action Original Original does not lie flat. YES Change original.

  • Page 611: Scanner System: Moire

    18. Image quality problem Field Service Ver. 4.0 Jun. 2008 18.3.7 Scanner system: moire A. Typical faulty images A02EF4C513DA B. Troubleshooting procedure Step Section Check item Result Action Original Moire distortions recur even after Change the original mode the orientation of original has been (select one other than that changed.

  • Page 612: Scanner System: Skewed Image

    Field Service Ver. 4.0 Jun. 2008 18. Image quality problem 18.3.8 Scanner system: skewed image A. Typical faulty images A02EF4C514DA B. Troubleshooting procedure Step Section Check item Result Action Original Original is skew. YES Reposition original. Original glass Original glass is in positive contact Reinstall the glass.

  • Page 613: Scanner System: Distorted Image

    18. Image quality problem Field Service Ver. 4.0 Jun. 2008 18.3.9 Scanner system: distorted image A. Typical faulty images ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE A02EF4C515DA B. Troubleshooting procedure Step Section Check item Result Action Installation Machine is installed on a level sur- Reinstall.

  • Page 614: Scanner System: Low Image Density, Rough Image

    Field Service Ver. 4.0 Jun. 2008 18. Image quality problem 18.3.10 Scanner system: low image density, rough image A. Typical faulty images ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE A02EF4C516DA B. Troubleshooting procedure Step Section Check item Result Action Original glass Original glass is dirty. YES Wipe the surface clean with a soft cloth.

  • Page 615: Scanner System: Defective Acs

    18. Image quality problem Field Service Ver. 4.0 Jun. 2008 18.3.11 Scanner system: defective ACS A. Typical faulty images Colored area of original ABCDE ABCDE Black-and-white area of original ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE A02EF4C517DA B. Troubleshooting procedure Step Section Check item Result Action Auto Color Level...

  • Page 616: Scanner System: Blank Copy, Black Copy

    Field Service Ver. 4.0 Jun. 2008 18. Image quality problem 18.3.12 Scanner system: blank copy, black copy A. Typical faulty images Blank copy Black copy A02EF4C518DA B. Troubleshooting procedure Step Section Check item Result Action Cable connecting Connector is connected properly Reconnect.

  • Page 617: Scanner System: Abnormal Image

    18. Image quality problem Field Service Ver. 4.0 Jun. 2008 18.3.13 Scanner system: abnormal image A. Typical faulty images ABCDE ABCDE Data on ABCDE previous page ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE Data on ABCDE current page ABCDE A02EF4C519DA B. Troubleshooting procedure Step Section Check item Result...

  • Page 618: Scanner System: Uneven Density

    Field Service Ver. 4.0 Jun. 2008 18. Image quality problem 18.3.14 Scanner system: uneven density A. Typical faulty images A02EF4C520DA B. Troubleshooting procedure (1) When the original glass is used Step Section Check item Result Action 2nd/3rd mirrors Scanner assy is not properly YES Perform “Focus positioning of the carriage aligned with 2nd/3rd mirrors car-...

  • Page 619: Printer Monocolor: White Lines In Sub Scan Direction, White Bands In Sub Scan

    18. Image quality problem Field Service Ver. 4.0 Jun. 2008 18.3.15 Printer monocolor: white lines in sub scan direction, white bands in sub scan direction, colored lines colored bands in sub scan direction A. Typical faulty images White bands in sub Colored lines in sub Colored bands in sub White lines in sub...

  • Page 620: Printer Monocolor: White Lines In Main Scan Direction, White Bands In Main

    Field Service Ver. 4.0 Jun. 2008 18. Image quality problem 18.3.16 Printer monocolor: white lines in main scan direction, white bands in main scan direction, colored lines in main scan direction, colored bands in main scan direction A. Typical faulty images Colored bands in main White bands in main Colored lines in main...

  • Page 621: Printer Monocolor: Uneven Density In Sub Scan Direction

    18. Image quality problem Field Service Ver. 4.0 Jun. 2008 18.3.17 Printer monocolor: uneven density in sub scan direction A. Typical faulty images A02EF4C521DA B. Troubleshooting procedure Step Section Check item Result Action High image Uneven density in sub scan direc- YES Feed 10 to 20 blank sheets of density original tion occurs at a pitch of 40 mm to...

  • Page 622: Printer Monocolor: Uneven Density In Main Scan Direction

    Field Service Ver. 4.0 Jun. 2008 18. Image quality problem 18.3.18 Printer monocolor: uneven density in main scan direction A. Typical faulty images A02EF4C520DA B. Troubleshooting procedure Step Section Check item Result Action Machine The problem has been eliminated Go to next step. →...

  • Page 623: Printer Monocolor: Low Image Density

    18. Image quality problem Field Service Ver. 4.0 Jun. 2008 18.3.19 Printer monocolor: low image density A. Typical faulty images ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE A02EF4C516DA B. Troubleshooting procedure Step Section Check item Result Action Warning display The maintenance call mark is YES Take action according to the displayed on the panel.
  • Page 624 Field Service Ver. 4.0 Jun. 2008 18. Image quality problem Step Section Check item Result Action Hopper unit Connectors are loose. YES Reconnect. Gear is cracked. YES Change gear. Image Process Toner is properly supplied when Go to next step. Adjustment →...

  • Page 625: Printer Monocolor: Gradation Reproduction Failure

    18. Image quality problem Field Service Ver. 4.0 Jun. 2008 18.3.20 Printer monocolor: gradation reproduction failure A. Typical faulty images A02EF4C522DA B. Troubleshooting procedure Step Section Check item Result Action Warning display The maintenance call mark is YES Take action according to the displayed on the panel.

  • Page 626: Printer Monocolor: Foggy Background

    Field Service Ver. 4.0 Jun. 2008 18. Image quality problem 18.3.21 Printer monocolor: foggy background A. Typical faulty images ABCD ABCD ABCD ABCD ABCD A02EF4C510DA B. Troubleshooting procedure Step Section Check item Result Action Warning display The maintenance call mark is YES Take action according to the displayed on the panel.
  • Page 627 18. Image quality problem Field Service Ver. 4.0 Jun. 2008 Step Section Check item Result Action Image Process “Conv. Value” falls within the YES Go to step 17. Adjustment specified range as checked through →Gradation gradation adjust. Adjust Dark: 0 ± 100 (Service Mode) Highlight: 0 ±...

  • Page 628: Printer Monocolor: Void Areas, White Spots

    Field Service Ver. 4.0 Jun. 2008 18. Image quality problem 18.3.22 Printer monocolor: void areas, white spots A. Typical faulty images Void areas White spots A02EF4C523DA B. Troubleshooting procedure Step Section Check item Result Action Image check There are void areas at the front See P.578 side or high density section.

  • Page 629: Printer Monocolor: Colored Spots

    18. Image quality problem Field Service Ver. 4.0 Jun. 2008 18.3.23 Printer monocolor: colored spots A. Typical faulty images A02EF4C524DA B. Troubleshooting procedure Step Section Check item Result Action Imaging unit Developing bias contact terminal Clean contact terminal and makes good connection. check terminal position.

  • Page 630: Printer Monocolor: Blurred Image

    Field Service Ver. 4.0 Jun. 2008 18. Image quality problem 18.3.24 Printer monocolor: blurred image A. Typical faulty images A02EF4C511DA B. Troubleshooting procedure Step Section Check item Result Action PH unit The surface of the PH window is YES Clean with cleaning jig. dirty.

  • Page 631: Printer Monocolor: Blank Copy, Black Copy

    18. Image quality problem Field Service Ver. 4.0 Jun. 2008 18.3.25 Printer monocolor: blank copy, black copy A. Typical faulty images Blank copy Black copy A02EF4C518DA B. Troubleshooting procedure Step Section Check item Result Action Image check A blank copy occurs. YES Check PH unit connector for proper connection.

  • Page 632: Printer Monocolor: Uneven Image

    Field Service Ver. 4.0 Jun. 2008 18. Image quality problem 18.3.26 Printer monocolor: uneven image A. Typical faulty images A02EF4C525DA B. Troubleshooting procedure Step Section Check item Result Action Toner cartridge The toner cartridge of every color Re-install it. is surely installed. PH unit The PH unit is surely installed.

  • Page 633: Printer 4-Color: White Lines In Sub Scan Direction, White Bands In Sub Scan

    18. Image quality problem Field Service Ver. 4.0 Jun. 2008 18.3.27 Printer 4-color: white lines in sub scan direction, white bands in sub scan direction, colored lines in sub scan direction, and colored bands in sub scan direction A. Typical faulty images White lines in sub White bands in sub Colored lines in sub...

  • Page 634: Printer 4-Color: White Lines In Main Scan Direction, White Bands In Main Scan Direction, Colored Lines In Main Scan Direction, And Colored Bands In Main Scan Direction

    Field Service Ver. 4.0 Jun. 2008 18. Image quality problem 18.3.28 Printer 4-color: white lines in main scan direction, white bands in main scan direction, colored lines in main scan direction, and colored bands in main scan direction A. Typical faulty images White lines in main White bands in Colored lines in main...

  • Page 635: Printer 4-Color: Uneven Density In Sub Scan Direction

    18. Image quality problem Field Service Ver. 4.0 Jun. 2008 18.3.29 Printer 4-color: uneven density in sub scan direction A. Typical faulty images A02EF4C526DA B. Troubleshooting procedure Step Section Check item Result Action Transfer belt unit Fingerprints, oil, or other foreign YES Clean.

  • Page 636: Printer 4-Color: Uneven Density In Main Scan Direction

    Field Service Ver. 4.0 Jun. 2008 18. Image quality problem 18.3.30 Printer 4-color: uneven density in main scan direction A. Typical faulty images A02EF4C521DA B. Troubleshooting procedure Step Section Check item Result Action Transfer belt unit Fingerprints, oil, or other foreign YES Clean.

  • Page 637: Printer 4-Color: Low Image Density

    18. Image quality problem Field Service Ver. 4.0 Jun. 2008 18.3.31 Printer 4-color: low image density A. Typical faulty images ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE A02EF4C516DA B. Troubleshooting procedure Step Section Check item Result Action Paper Paper is damp. YES Change paper to one just unwrapped from its package.

  • Page 638: Printer 4-Color: Poor Color Reproduction

    Field Service Ver. 4.0 Jun. 2008 18. Image quality problem 18.3.32 Printer 4-color: poor color reproduction A. Typical faulty images A02EF4C527DA B. Troubleshooting procedure Step Section Check item Result Action Paper Paper is damp. YES Change paper to one just unwrapped from its package.

  • Page 639: Printer 4-Color: Incorrect Color Image Registration

    18. Image quality problem Field Service Ver. 4.0 Jun. 2008 18.3.33 Printer 4-color: incorrect color image registration A. Typical faulty images A02EF4C512DA B. Troubleshooting procedure Step Section Check item Result Action Warning display The maintenance call mark is YES Take action according to the displayed on the panel.

  • Page 640: Printer 4-Color: Void Areas, White Spots

    Field Service Ver. 4.0 Jun. 2008 18. Image quality problem 18.3.34 Printer 4-color: void areas, white spots A. Typical faulty images Void areas White spots A02EF4C523DA B. Troubleshooting procedure Step Section Check item Result Action Image check There are void areas at the front P.593 side or high density section.

  • Page 641: Printer 4-Color: Colored Spots

    18. Image quality problem Field Service Ver. 4.0 Jun. 2008 18.3.35 Printer 4-color: colored spots A. Typical faulty images A02EF4C509DA B. Troubleshooting procedure Step Section Check item Result Action Imaging unit The surface of the PC drum is YES Change imaging unit. scratched.

  • Page 642: Printer 4-Color: Poor Fusing Performance, Offset

    Field Service Ver. 4.0 Jun. 2008 18. Image quality problem 18.3.36 Printer 4-color: poor fusing performance, offset A. Typical faulty images Poor fusing performance Offset A02EF4C528DA B. Troubleshooting procedure Step Section Check item Result Action Paper Paper type does not match. YES Change the setting.

  • Page 643: Printer 4-Color: Brush Effect, Blurred Image

    18. Image quality problem Field Service Ver. 4.0 Jun. 2008 18.3.37 Printer 4-color: brush effect, blurred image A. Typical faulty images Brush effect Blurred image A02EF4C529DA B. Troubleshooting procedure Step Section Check item Result Action Paper Paper is damp. YES Change paper to one just unwrapped from its package.

  • Page 644: Printer 4-Color: Back Marking

    Field Service Ver. 4.0 Jun. 2008 18. Image quality problem 18.3.38 Printer 4-color: back marking A. Typical faulty images A02EF4C530DA B. Troubleshooting procedure Step Section Check item Result Action 2nd image trans- Image transfer roller is scratched or YES Change transfer roller unit. fer roller unit dirty.

  • Page 645: Printer 4-Color: Uneven Image

    18. Image quality problem Field Service Ver. 4.0 Jun. 2008 18.3.39 Printer 4-color: uneven image A. Typical faulty images A02EF4C525DA B. Troubleshooting procedure Step Section Check item Result Action Toner cartridge The toner cartridge of every color Re-install it. is surely installed. PH unit The PH unit is surely installed.

  • Page 646: Appendix

    Field Service Ver. 4.0 Jun. 2008 19. Parts layout drawing Appendix 19. Parts layout drawing 19.1 Main body 19.1.1 Scanner section [16] [15 ] [14] [13] [12] [11] [10] A00JF5E501DA Scanner motor (M201) Exposure lamp (FL201) 20 degree sensor (PS202) [10] Inverter board (INVB) Original size detection sensor/1 (PS204) [11] Original glass moving motor (M202)

  • Page 647: Engine Section

    Fusing cooling fan motor/3 (FM11) * Exhaust fan motor (FM4) Fusing cooling fan motor/1 (FM9) [10] Cooling fan motor/2 (FM2) Suction fan motor (FM8) [11] MFP board cooling fan motor (FM6) Toner suction fan motor (FM3) *: bizhub C353 only...
  • Page 648 Field Service Ver. 4.0 Jun. 2008 19. Parts layout drawing [18] [16] [17] [15] [14] [13] [10] [12] [11] A02EF5C512DA NVRAM board (NRB) [10] Erase lamp/Y (EL/Y) Speaker (SP) [11] Waste toner full sensor (PS32) Control panel (UN201) [12] DC power supply (DCPU) Right door switch (S5) [13] Service EEPROM board (SV ERB) Front door switch/1 (S3)
  • Page 649 19. Parts layout drawing Field Service Ver. 4.0 Jun. 2008 [20] [21] [19] [18] [17] [16] [15] [14] [10] [13] [11] [12] A02EF5C513DA Switchback motor (M6) [12] Main power switch (S1) Fusing motor (M5) [13] Total counter (TCT) Duplex transport motor (M7) [14] Transport motor (M1) 2nd image transfer retraction motor (M11) [15] Printer control board (PRCB)
  • Page 650 Field Service Ver. 4.0 Jun. 2008 19. Parts layout drawing [18] [19] [17] [16] [15] [14] [13] [12] [11] [10] A02EF5C516DA Duplex paper passage sensor/1 (PS33) [11] Color PC drive main sensor (PS27) Duplex door sensor (PS35) [12] Transfer belt retraction clutch (CL7) Duplex paper passage sensor/2 (PS34) [13] Transfer belt retraction sensor (PS31) 2nd image transfer welding alienation...

  • Page 651: Tray 1, Manual Bypass Tray

    19. Parts layout drawing Field Service Ver. 4.0 Jun. 2008 19.1.3 Tray 1, manual bypass tray [18] [15] [19] [16] [17] [14] [13] [10] [12] [11] A02EF5C514DA Manual paper feed clutch (CL4) [11] Paper feed tray 1 paper empty indicator board (PEIB/1) Manual lift-up position sensor (PS17) [12] Paper feed tray 1 paper FD size detect...

  • Page 652: Tray 2

    Field Service Ver. 4.0 Jun. 2008 19. Parts layout drawing 19.1.4 Tray 2 [14] [13] [12] [11] [10] A02EF5C515DA Paper feed tray 2 vertical transport sensor Paper feed tray 2 lift-up motor (M9) (PS16) Paper feed tray 2 paper empty indicator Paper feed tray 2 paper CD size detect board (PEIB/2) sensor/1 (PS11)

  • Page 653: Df-611 (Option)

    19. Parts layout drawing Field Service Ver. 4.0 Jun. 2008 19.2 DF-611 (option) [13] [14] [12] [11] [10] A01HF5C500DB Document width detection variable resistor (VR1) Registration clutch (CL1) Switchback roller pressure/retraction motor (M5) Reading motor (M1) Reading roller pressure/retraction motor (M4) [10] Take-up motor (M2) Brake clutch (CL3) [11] Take-up clutch (CL2)
  • Page 654 Field Service Ver. 4.0 Jun. 2008 19. Parts layout drawing [21] [20] [19] [18] [17] [16] [15] [13] [14] [12] [10] [11] A01HF5C501DB Length sensor/1 (PS10) [12] Consolidation/2 (PS18) Length sensor/3 (PS12) [13] Consolidation/1 (PS19) Length sensor/4 (PS13) [14] Reverse registration sensor (PS8) Length sensor/2 (PS11) [15] Before read sensor (PS9) Lift up upper sensor (PS16)

  • Page 655: Pc-104/204 (Option)

    19. Parts layout drawing Field Service Ver. 4.0 Jun. 2008 19.3 PC-104/204 (option) [26] [28] [27] [25] [22] [24] [21] [23] [20] [19] [18] [10] [11] [17] [16] [15] [12] [14] [13] A093F5E502DA Tray3 door set sensor (PS111) [15] Tray4 lift-up motor (M125) Tray3 upper limit sensor (PS114) [16] Tray4 CD paper size sensor/2 (PS128) Tray3 vertical transport sensor (PS117)

  • Page 656: Pc-405 (Option)

    Field Service Ver. 4.0 Jun. 2008 19. Parts layout drawing 19.4 PC-405 (option) [24] [25] [23] [21] [20] [22] [19] [18] [17] [11] [16] [10] [15] [12] [13] [14] A093F5E503DA Door sensor (PS5) [14] Shift tray empty sensor (PS9) Vertical transport sensor (PS2) [15] Shift tray stop sensor (PS11) Lift-up upper sensor (PS4) [16] Shift tray home sensor (PS12)

  • Page 657: Fs-519 (Option)

    19. Parts layout drawing Field Service Ver. 4.0 Jun. 2008 19.5 FS-519 (option) [13] [14] [12] [11] [10] 9J06F5C514DA Entrance switch back sensor (PS4) Elevator top face detection sensor (PS12) Transport sensor (PS2) Exit paddle home position sensor (PS6) Entrance sensor (PS1) [10] Alignment home position sensor /1 (PS7) Storage tray detect sensor (PS3) [11] Stapler save position sensor (PS10)
  • Page 658 Field Service Ver. 4.0 Jun. 2008 19. Parts layout drawing [12] [11] [10] 9J06F5C515DA Skew registration clutch (CL1) FS control board (FSCB) Duplex guide solenoid (SD3) Relay board/1 (REYB/1) Shutter detect switch (SW2) Slide switch (SW4) Relay board/2 (REYB/2) [10] Exit paddle solenoid (SD2) Storage paddle solenoid (SD1) [11] Elevator tray switch (SW3) Front door switch (SW1)
  • Page 659 19. Parts layout drawing Field Service Ver. 4.0 Jun. 2008 [11] [10] A00KF5C501DA Cooling fan motor (FM9) Elevator motor (M11) Entrance motor (M1) Align motor/1 (M5) Exit roller motor (M10) Transport motor/2 (M3) Align motor/2 (M6) [10] Shutter motor (M8) Exit motor (M4) [11] Transport motor/1 (M2) Stapling unit moving motor (M7)

  • Page 660: Pk-515 (Option)

    Field Service Ver. 4.0 Jun. 2008 19. Parts layout drawing 19.6 PK-515 (option) 9J06F5C505DA Punch trash full sensor (PS30)

  • Page 661: Mt-502 (Option)

    19. Parts layout drawing Field Service Ver. 4.0 Jun. 2008 19.7 MT-502 (option) [16] [15] [14] [13] [12] [11] [10] 9J06F5C506DA Cover open/close sensor (PS11) Paper detection sensor 1 (PS1) Paper full detection sensor 4 (PS8) [10] Paper detection sensor 2 (PS2) Paper detection sensor 4 (PS4) [11] Paper detection sensor 3 (PS3) Paper full detection sensor 3 (PS7)

  • Page 662: Sd-505 (Option)

    Field Service Ver. 4.0 Jun. 2008 19. Parts layout drawing 19.8 SD-505 (option) [14] [13] [12] [11] [10] 9J06F5C507DA Crease motor (M10) Saddle tray empty sensor (PS21) Crease roller home position sensor (PS22) In & out guide motor (M13) Layable guide home sensor (PS24) [10] Transport pulse sensor (PS25) Saddle opening switch (SW4) [11] Saddle exit motor (M8)

  • Page 663: Js-505 (Option)

    19. Parts layout drawing Field Service Ver. 4.0 Jun. 2008 19.9 JS-505 (option) [13] [14] [15] [12] [11] [10] A083F5C500DA Route change motor (M3) Lower tray paper full detect board/PR (T1FDTB/PR) Route change home sensor (PS4) [10] JS control board (JSCB) Pressure/retraction home sensor (PS5) [11] Transport Motor (M1) Shift motor (M2)

  • Page 664: Fs-609 (Option)

    Field Service Ver. 4.0 Jun. 2008 19. Parts layout drawing 19.10 FS-609 (option) [17] [16] [15] [14] [13] [12] [11] [10] A0D6F5C500DA Transport motor (M1) [10] Lift motor (M6) Entrance motor (M9) [11] Slide motor (M8) Saddle clutch (CL1) [12] Exit motor (M3) Joint open switch (SW2) [13] Rear aligning motor (M5) Front door open switch (SW1)
  • Page 665 19. Parts layout drawing Field Service Ver. 4.0 Jun. 2008 [19] [20] [18] [17] [16] [15] [14] [13] [12] [11] [10] A0D6F5C501DA Entrance sensor (PS1) [11] Saddle tray sensor (PS13) Folding roller home position sensor (PS12) [12] Lift motor clock sensor (PS17) Folding home position sensor (PS11) [13] Stack full sensor (PS24) Folding position sensor (PS10)
  • Page 666 Field Service Ver. 4.0 Jun. 2008 19. Parts layout drawing A0D6F5C503DA Entrance switching solenoid (SD1) Paper sensor (PS25) Turnover empty sensor (PS27) Horizontal unit door sensor (PS26)

  • Page 667: Pk-501 (Option)

    19. Parts layout drawing Field Service Ver. 4.0 Jun. 2008 19.11 PK-501 (option) [10] A0D6F5C502DA Punch motor (M1) Side registration motor (M2) Side registration home sensor (PS2) Punch trash full LED board (PTFB/LED) Punch motor cock sensor (PS3) Punch trash full photo sensor board (PTFB/PR) Photo sensor board (PSB) Punch control board (PKCB)

  • Page 668: 20. Connector Layout Drawing

    Field Service Ver. 4.0 Jun. 2008 20. Connector layout drawing 20. Connector layout drawing Description ➀ Number of pin Possible to confirm by removing external cover. Not possible to confirm by removing external cover. [16] [15] [14] [13] [12] [11] [10] A02EF5C517DA CN No.
  • Page 669 20. Connector layout drawing Field Service Ver. 4.0 Jun. 2008 [19] [18] [17] [16] [15] [14] [13] [10] [12] [11] A02EF5C506DA CN No. Location CN No. Location CN140 D-20 [11] J-17 CN55 D-20 [12] CN69 E-17 to 18 CN54 D-20 [13] CN126 J-7 to 8...
  • Page 670 Field Service Ver. 4.0 Jun. 2008 20. Connector layout drawing A02EF5C518DA CN No. Location CN No. Location CN49 CN2AC J-16 CN103 I-11 CN120 CN98 I-10 CN125 CN136 D-28 CN84 D-25...

  • Page 671: 21. Timing Chart

    21. Timing chart Field Service Ver. 4.0 Jun. 2008 21. Timing chart 21.1 Main body Color mode/A4 or 8 x 11/tray1 Print request received Pre-rotation Post-rotation Polygon motor LD enable (Y/M/C) LD enable (K) Transfer belt retraction clutch (CL7) 2nd image transfer retraction motor (M11) Color PC motor (M2) Reverse-rotation Transport motor (M1)

  • Page 672: Df-611

    Field Service Ver. 4.0 Jun. 2008 21. Timing chart 21.2 DF-611 21.2.1 1-sided mode...
  • Page 673 21. Timing chart Field Service Ver. 4.0 Jun. 2008 21.2.2 2-sided mode...
  • Page 674 Field Service Ver. 4.0 Jun. 2008 21. Timing chart...
  • Page 675 21. Timing chart Field Service Ver. 4.0 Jun. 2008 Blank Page...
  • Page 676 SERVICE MANUAL FIELD SERVICE 2008.06 Ver. 4.0...
  • Page 677 Revision history After publication of this service manual, the parts and mechanism may be subject to change for improvement of their performance. Therefore, the descriptions given in this service manual may not coincide with the actual machine. When any change has been made to the descriptions in the service manual, a revised version will be issued with a revision mark added as required.
  • Page 678 Field Service Ver. 4.0 Jun. 2008 CONTENTS Standard controller Outline Controller specifications ..................1 Type ........................1 Supporting client specifications ................2 Maintenance Checking the controller firmware version ..............3 Firmware upgrade ....................3 Outline ........................3 Notes about firmware rewrite................3 3.2.1 Types of firmware ..................
  • Page 679 Field Service Ver. 4.0 Jun. 2008 Troubleshooting Checking the system configuration ............... 33 Status codes ......................33 Troubleshooting procedures.................. 33 Unable to print over the network................. 33 Unable to transmit data through Scan to FTP............. 35 Unable to transmit data through Scan to E-Mail..........36 E-mail does not reach the destination when transmission through Scan to E-Mail is completed.

  • Page 680: Outline

    Field Service Ver. 4.0 Jun. 2008 1. Controller specifications Outline Controller specifications Type Type Built-in type controller bizhub C353 35 prints/min (color/monochrome, A4, 1-sided) Print speed bizhub C253 25 prints/min (color/monochrome, A4, 1-sided) bizhub C203 20 prints/min (color/monochrome, A4, 1-sided) bizhub C353 5.9 sec.

  • Page 681: Supporting Client Specifications

    1. Controller specifications Field Service Ver. 4.0 Jun. 2008 PostScript PPD • Macintosh OS 9.2 or later driver • Macintosh OS X 10.2/10.3/10.4 • Windows NT4.0 (SP6a or later) • Windows 2000 Professional (SP4 or later) • Windows XP Home Edition/Professional (SP2 or later) Driver •...

  • Page 682: Maintenance

    Internet ISW. Notes about firmware rewrite 3.2.1 Types of firmware • Two types of firmware are released for bizhub C353/C253/C203. They are a mainte- nance release version and an enhanced version. Maintenance release version : Addresses remaining problems Function enhanced version...
  • Page 683 3. Firmware upgrade Field Service Ver. 4.0 Jun. 2008 A. Upgrade to the function enhancement 2 from the early mass-production firm- ware/function enhancement 1 1. After rewriting the firmware, turn OFF and ON the main power switch and sub power switch.

  • Page 684: Preparations For Firmware Rewriting By Windows Command Prompt

    Field Service Ver. 4.0 Jun. 2008 3. Firmware upgrade Preparations for firmware rewriting by Windows Command Prompt 3.3.1 Service environment • OS: Windows 2000/XP • Drive which enables writing/reading of compact flash • Compact flash (service tool) 3.3.2 Writing into the compact flash 1.
  • Page 685 • For ## within the above mkcf command, type two characters that correspond to the machine model on which firmware upgrading is made. Take a look at the following list to find right characters for a correct command. Model and command list bizhub C353 bizhub C253 bizhub C203 A02EF2E531DA 7.
  • Page 686 Field Service Ver. 4.0 Jun. 2008 3. Firmware upgrade 4038F2E565DB 9. Remove the compact flash from PC. NOTE • When removing the compact flash, be sure to check if data is written as normal and then remove it according to the precise removing method.

  • Page 687: Correspond Model

    • This software is designed as the tool to write firmware data of MFP/printer released by KMBT into the compact flash card. 3.4.1 Correspond model • Correspond models of the software is as follows. • bizhub C650/C550/C451/C450/C353/C352/C351/C350/C300/C253/C250/C203 Color machine • bizhub C450P/C353P/C352P/C250P • bizhub 350/250/200 B/W machine •...

  • Page 688: Installation Of Software

    Field Service Ver. 4.0 Jun. 2008 3. Firmware upgrade 3.4.4 Installation of software • Follow the procedures shown below to install the software. NOTE • Install the software to the PC with the administration authentication. • When any anti-virus program is activated, quite the program before the installa- tion.
  • Page 689 3. Firmware upgrade Field Service Ver. 4.0 Jun. 2008 3. After checking the contents of license agreement, select [I accept the terms in the license agreement] and click [Next >]. 9J06F2E701DA 4. Select the installed destination folder of Firmware Imaging Toolkit 2006, and click [Next>].

  • Page 690: Update Of Software

    Field Service Ver. 4.0 Jun. 2008 3. Firmware upgrade 5. Click [Install] to start installation. 6. Click [Finish] to complete the installation. 9J06F2E703DA 7. Shortcut file will be created inside Windows Start menu ([Program] → [KONICA MINOLTA] → [Firmware Imaging Toolkit 2006]). 9J06F2E708DA 3.4.5 Update of software...

  • Page 691: Screen

    3. Firmware upgrade Field Service Ver. 4.0 Jun. 2008 3.4.6 Screen A. Main window • The main window will be displayed after activating the software. • Main window consists of 2 patterns: Basic mode, Advanced mode When the advanced mode is selected 9J06F2E704DA About •...
  • Page 692 Field Service Ver. 4.0 Jun. 2008 3. Firmware upgrade B. Settings dialog • It will be displayed by clicking [Settings] at main window. • Other settings will be enabled by selecting the check box of [Enabled Advanced Fea- tures]. 9J06F2E705DA Enable Advanced •...

  • Page 693: Details Of Each Function

    Although the compact flash with larger capacity than the original one can be used, it is not covered under warranty. • C350 firmware requires the compact flash over 64 MB. • Firmware of C650/C550/C451/C450/C450P/C353P/C353/C352/C352P/C351/C300/ C253/C250/C250P/C203 requires the compact flash over 128 MB. (2) Compare Firmware with a card •...
  • Page 694 The information to be displayed is according to the type of written FW data. • For the series of Di3510/200/250/350 series, MSC version is displayed. • For the series of C650/C550/C451/C450/C450P/C353/C353P/C352/C352P/C351/C350/ C300/C253/C250/C250P/C203, check sums of each firmware data is displayed.

  • Page 695: How To Write Firmware Data

    3. Firmware upgrade Field Service Ver. 4.0 Jun. 2008 3.4.8 How to write firmware data A. In the case of C650/C550/C451/C450/C450P/C353/C353P/C352/C352P/C351/C350/ C300/C253/C250/C250P/C203 series 1. Put the firmware data in the optional directory. (C:\bizhub in the below figure) 9J06F2E710DA NOTE • The file name of firmware data consists of the “Release Date_Version_CHECKSUM-****.exe.”...
  • Page 696 Field Service Ver. 4.0 Jun. 2008 3. Firmware upgrade 3. Mount the compact flash on the PC, and check the drive name, which was recognized in the Windows. (F-drive in the following figure) 9J06F2E712DA 4. Start Firmware Imaging Toolkit 2006. NOTE •...
  • Page 697 Field Service Ver. 4.0 Jun. 2008 6. Click [Browse]. 9J06F2E707DA 7. Select the file type [C353/C253/C203 Indexed Firmware]. 8. Move to the folder decompressed at step 2, confirm that only "###_cf.tar.gz" (### is for model name) is displayed, and select.
  • Page 698 Field Service Ver. 4.0 Jun. 2008 3. Firmware upgrade 10. Select the drive that the compact flash is inserted, which is confirmed at step 3. NOTE • The drives other than the compact flash that is recognized as “Removable Disk” can be selected for the writing destination.
  • Page 699 3. Firmware upgrade Field Service Ver. 4.0 Jun. 2008 13. Click [Yes], and data writing starts. NOTE • Writing a card is a resource intensive operation for your computer - do not attempt to multitask (use the computer for anything else) during the writing procedure. 14.

  • Page 700: Firmware Rewriting By Compact Flash

    Field Service Ver. 4.0 Jun. 2008 3. Firmware upgrade Firmware rewriting by compact flash • The firmware is updated using the compact flash. 3.5.1 Updating method NOTE • NEVER remove or insert the compact flash card with the machine power turned 1.
  • Page 701 3. Firmware upgrade Field Service Ver. 4.0 Jun. 2008 7. Select the particular type of F/W to be updated. (Select [YES].) A02EF2C522DA F/W to be updated Appropriate board MFP CONTROLLER MFP board (MFPB) SCANNER Image processing board (IPB) PRINTER Printer control board (PRCB) FAX BOARD CONTROLLER1 Fax board (Main) *1 FAX BOARD CONTROLLER2 Fax board (Sub) *2 ADF (DF-M)

  • Page 702: Action When Data Transfer Fails

    Field Service Ver. 4.0 Jun. 2008 3. Firmware upgrade NOTE • When turning the main power switch ON for the first time after the firmware is updated, data may sometimes be internally updated. In that case, the following message will be displayed. Never turn the main power switch OFF until either the serial number input screen or the trouble code screen is displayed.

  • Page 703: Updating The Firmware With The Internet Isw

    3. Firmware upgrade Field Service Ver. 4.0 Jun. 2008 Updating the firmware with the Internet ISW 3.6.1 Outline • [Internet ISW] is the system which gives the instruction for updating the firmware with the control panel of the main body, so the main body will automatically receive the firmware from the program server over a network for updating.
  • Page 704 Field Service Ver. 4.0 Jun. 2008 3. Firmware upgrade 3. Touch [ON], and touch [END]. NOTE • Settings such as server setting, etc. will be available by selecting “ON” on this set- ting. • When the following setting is set to “ON”, “ON” cannot be selected on this setting. [Administrator Setting] →...
  • Page 705 3. Firmware upgrade Field Service Ver. 4.0 Jun. 2008 C. Forwarding access setting • To make the access setting for the program server which stores the firmware data. 1. Select [Internet ISW] which is available from [Service Mode]. 2. Touch [Forwarding Access Setting]. A00JF2E584DA 3.

  • Page 706: Firmware Rewriting

    Field Service Ver. 4.0 Jun. 2008 3. Firmware upgrade 3.6.4 Firmware rewriting NOTE • When performing the Internet ISW, ask the administrator for permission before- hand. • DO NOT turn OFF the main/sub power switch while downloading. A. Conducting rewriting on the control panel. 1.
  • Page 707 3. Firmware upgrade Field Service Ver. 4.0 Jun. 2008 C. Completed or failed (1) Firmware updated normally 1. When the Firmware is normally updated, restart the main body in auto or manual mode to display the outcome, and touch [OK] to return to the main screen. (2) Failing to update the firmware due to the network trouble 1.

  • Page 708: Error Code List For The Internet Isw

    [Service Mode] → [Internet ISW] → [Transfer access setting] • If the above process does not solve the problem, inform the corresponding error code to the KONICA MINOLTA. • Check if the following setting is set to “Valid”. [Service Mode] → [Internet ISW] →...
  • Page 709 3. Firmware upgrade Field Service Ver. 4.0 Jun. 2008 Error code Description Countermeasure Control panel • Check the User’s network environment. (LAN cable’s connection) • Check the status of the following set- Error concerning the network ting. 0x00111000 [Service Mode] → [Internet ISW] → •...
  • Page 710 • If the above process does not solve the • There is no space for F/W data to be 0x10000104 problem, inform the corresponding downloaded. error code to the KONICA MINOLTA. 0x10000106 • Check sum error File access error • The file downloaded has an error.
  • Page 711 3. Firmware upgrade Field Service Ver. 4.0 Jun. 2008 Blank Page...

  • Page 712: Troubleshooting

    Field Service Ver. 4.0 Jun. 2008 4. Checking the system configuration Troubleshooting Checking the system configuration • When a malfunction occurs, let the printer print a configuration page to check for system configuration. 1. Press the Utility/Counter key. 2. Touch [User Setting] → [Printer Setting] → [Print Reports]. 3.
  • Page 713 6. Troubleshooting procedures Field Service Ver. 4.0 Jun. 2008 Check Possible Cause Action Remark The print destination Set the correct See “User’s Guide port setting is wrong. port. [Print Operations].” PC operates errati- Restart the PC. cally temporarily. Uninstall the printer Printer driver incor- driver through the See “User’s Guide...

  • Page 714: Unable To Transmit Data Through Scan To Ftp

    Field Service Ver. 4.0 Jun. 2008 6. Troubleshooting procedures Unable to transmit data through Scan to FTP. Check Possible Cause Action Remark The FTP server is not in Check with the network service. administrator. Check with the network IP address of the FTP administrator and enter server is wrong.

  • Page 715: Unable To Transmit Data Through Scan To E-Mail

    6. Troubleshooting procedures Field Service Ver. 4.0 Jun. 2008 Unable to transmit data through Scan to E-Mail. Check Possible Cause Action Remark The SMTP server is not in Check with the network service. administrator. Check with the network IP address of the SMTP administrator and enter the server is wrong.
  • Page 716 SERVICE MANUAL FIELD SERVICE 2008.06 Ver. 2.0...
  • Page 717 Revision history After publication of this service manual, the parts and mechanism may be subject to change for improvement of their performance. Therefore, the descriptions given in this service manual may not coincide with the actual machine. When any change has been made to the descriptions in the service manual, a revised version will be issued with a revision mark added as required.
  • Page 718 Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jun. 2008 CONTENTS i-Option LK-101/102/103 Outline Product outline ......................1 Available function for i-Option ................1 Product specification..................... 2 1.2.1 Web browser function ................... 2 1.2.2 Photo registration function ................2 Adjustment/Setting How to use the adjustment section ................. 3 Service Mode ......................
  • Page 719 Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jun. 2008 Blank Page...

  • Page 720: Outline

    Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jun. 2008 1. Product outline Outline Product outline Available function for i-Option • The functions available for i-Option LK-101/102/103 are as follows. Application Function Overview LK-101 LK-102 LK-103 • From the control panel, access content on the Inter- net or Intranet, in order to display or print this con- ✓...

  • Page 721: Product Specification

    1. Product outline Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jun. 2008 Product specification 1.2.1 Web browser function • Main specifications of the web browser installed are as follows. Browser engine NetFront Supported protocols HTTP, HTTPS, TCP/IP Supported markup/script HTML, CSS, JavaSrcript languages Supported image formats JPEG, BMP, PNG, GIF, Animation GIF, PDF, Flash Supported SSL/TLS versions...

  • Page 722: Adjustment/Setting

    Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jun. 2008 2. How to use the adjustment section Adjustment/Setting How to use the adjustment section • “Adjustment/Setting” contains detailed information on the adjustment items and proce- dures for this machine. • Throughout this “Adjustment/Setting,” the default settings are indicated by “ ”. Advance checks Before attempting to solve the customer problem, the following advance checks must be made.

  • Page 723: Service Mode

    3. Service Mode Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jun. 2008 Service Mode • When using i-Option LK-101/102/103, license management is done with the following procedures. [Service Mode] → [Billing Setting] → [License Management] • [License Management] can set Activation/Deactivation of each i-Option functions, Repair/Initialize of functions for troubleshooting, or etc.

  • Page 724: Billing Setting Function Tree

    Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jun. 2008 3. Service Mode 5. Press the following keys in this order. → Stop 6. Billing Setting menu will appear. A00JF3E536DB Billing Setting function tree Service Mode Ref. Page Billing Setting Counter Setting Management Function Choice Coverage Rate Clear License Management *2 Activation *2...

  • Page 725: Settings In The License Management

    3. Service Mode Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jun. 2008 Settings in the License management 3.3.1 Activation Functions • To activate i-Option functions. • To activate i-Option functions with CE. • The functions can be activated by selecting the desired function and enter the appropri- ate license code.

  • Page 726: List

    Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jun. 2008 3. Service Mode 3.3.6 List Functions • To display activated functions. • To display and print deactivation complete code and serial number. • To display activated functions. • To display and print deactivation complete code and serial number. Setting/ •...

  • Page 727: License Management Function Setting Procedure

    3. Service Mode Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jun. 2008 License Management function setting procedure • Each setting procedure of License Management function is as follows. • You need to access License Management System (LMS) to implement each function set- ting. 3.4.1 Activation 1.
  • Page 728 Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jun. 2008 3. Service Mode 7. Enter request code and serial number, and click [Next]. A0PDF3E524DA 8. Enter “token number” described in the “token certificate”, and select the product name. 9. Click [Next]. A0PDF3E525DA...
  • Page 729 3. Service Mode Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jun. 2008 10. Confirm the registered information, and click [Generate License Code]. A0PDF3E526DA 11. LMS issues license code. A0PDF3E527DA...
  • Page 730 Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jun. 2008 3. Service Mode 12. Select [Activation] → [License code] at the MFP. 13. Enter the license code issued by LMS using the keyboard on the screen, and touch [END]. A0PDF3E537DA 14. Select i-Option to be activated, and touch [Apply]. A0PDF3E538DA 15.

  • Page 731: Deactivation

    3. Service Mode Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jun. 2008 3.4.2 Deactivation 1. Call the Billing Setting to the screen. See P.4 2. Display and confirm the serial number with the following procedure. [License Management] → [Request code] See P.6 3. Access to LMS web site (for service). 4.
  • Page 732 Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jun. 2008 3. Service Mode 6. Enter serial number, and click [Retrieval]. A0PDF3E529DA 7. Select i-Option to be deactivated, and click [Registration]. A0PDF3E530DA...
  • Page 733 3. Service Mode Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jun. 2008 8. Nullification code is issued. A0PDF3E531DA 9. Select [Deactivation] → [Deactivation code] at the MFP. 10. Enter the nullification code issued by LMS using the keyboard on the screen, and touch [END].
  • Page 734 Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jun. 2008 3. Service Mode 11. Select i-Option to be deactivated, and touch [Apply]. A0PDF3E540DA 12. When the deactivation is done appropriately, serial number and deactivation complete code are issued. Serial Number 0123456789012 Deactivation 01234-56789-01234-56789-01234-56789-01234 Complete Code Turn the main switch OFF and ON.
  • Page 735 3. Service Mode Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jun. 2008 14. Click [Nullification completion] at LMS web site (for service). A0PDF3E532DA 15. Enter serial number and nullification code, and click [Registration]. A0PDF3E533DA 16. Message for nullification completion appears.

  • Page 736: Repair

    Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jun. 2008 3. Service Mode 3.4.3 Repair 1. Call the Billing Setting to the screen. See P.4 2. Display and confirm serial number, repair request code and request code with the fol- lowing procedure. [License Management] → [Repair] → [Repair Request Code] See P.6 NOTE •...
  • Page 737 3. Service Mode Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jun. 2008 6. Enter serial number, restoration demand code and request code, and click [Registra- tion]. A0PDF3E535DA 7. Request permission code is issued. If any function needs to be activated, appropriate license code is also issued. A0PDF3E536DA...
  • Page 738 Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jun. 2008 3. Service Mode 8. Select [Repair] → [Repair Code] at the MFP. 9. Enter the request permission code issued by LMS using the keyboard on the screen, and touch [END]. Repair Request Code Repair Code Repair A0PDF3E543DA 10.

  • Page 739: Initialize

    3. Service Mode Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jun. 2008 3.4.4 Initialize • When license management information cannot be repaired, initialize the information with the following procedure. 1. Contact the license management section of sales company to report the information necessary to issue the initialize code. 2.

  • Page 740: Troubleshooting

    Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jun. 2008 4. Troubleshooting of i-Option Troubleshooting Troubleshooting of i-Option Outline 4.1.1 Structure of license management • The functions available with i-Option can be activated by entering “License code” to the MFP. • License code is issued and controlled by License Management System (LMS). To prevent unauthorized use of the license code, each MFP is identified individually so that the license code cannot be activated unless it matches with the authorized MFP.

  • Page 741: Error Message

    4. Troubleshooting of i-Option Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jun. 2008 Error message 4.2.1 License management error • When abnormal value is detected in the license management information that is stored to the NVRAM board or service EEPROM board, or some values are detected cleared, warning is issued to let the user know the abnormality.
  • Page 742 Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jun. 2008 4. Troubleshooting of i-Option C. List of processing performed when boards of another machine are remounted during board replacement procedure • Remounting boards of machine B on machine A Machine B Request code is not gen- Request code is gener- erated in machine B Remarks:...
  • Page 743 4. Troubleshooting of i-Option Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jun. 2008 Blank Page...
  • Page 744 SERVICE MANUAL FIELD SERVICE 2008.01 Ver. 2.0...
  • Page 745 Revision history After publication of this service manual, the parts and mechanism may be subject to change for improvement of their performance. Therefore, the descriptions given in this service manual may not coincide with the actual machine. When any change has been made to the descriptions in the service manual, a revised version will be issued with a revision mark added as required.
  • Page 746 Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jan. 2008 CONTENTS DF-611 Outline Product specifications ..................... 1 Maintenance Periodical check ...................... 5 Maintenance procedure (Periodical check parts) ..........5 2.1.1 Pick-up roller/feed roller ................5 2.1.2 Separation roller.................... 7 2.1.3 Cleaning of the miscellaneous rolls .............. 9 2.1.4 Cleaning of the miscellaneous rollers ............
  • Page 747 Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jan. 2008 6.2.1 Original Stop Position ................. 28 6.2.2 Registration Loop Adj................. 28 6.2.3 Auto Stop Position Adjustment ..............28 6.2.4 Paper Passage ................... 29 6.2.5 Sensor Check ..................... 30 6.2.6 Original Tray Width..................32 6.2.7 Read Pos Adj ....................
  • Page 748 Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jan. 2008 9.2.5 C8302: Cooling fan failure................63 9.2.6 CC156: ADF ROM malfunction ..............63 9.2.7 Incorrect ROM content ................63 Set error detection....................64...
  • Page 749 Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jan. 2008 Blank Page...

  • Page 750: Outline

    Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jan. 2008 1. Product specifications Outline Product specifications A. Type Name Reverse automatic document feeder Paper feed section Paper feed from top of stack Image reading section Sheet-through system Type Turnover section Switchback system Exit section Straight exit system Installation Screw cramp to the main body...

  • Page 751: Product Specifications

    1. Product specifications Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jan. 2008 D. Paper feed prohibited originals • If fed, trouble occurrence will be highly possible. Type of original Possible trouble Paper feed failure, damaged sheet, defective Sheets stapled or clipped together drive mechanism due to jammed staples or clips Sheets glued together Paper feed failure, damaged sheet Book original...
  • Page 752 Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jan. 2008 1. Product specifications F. Mixed original feed chart For metric Max. original 297 mm 257 mm 210 mm 182 mm 148 mm 128 mm size Mixed original size — — — — — — —...
  • Page 753 1. Product specifications Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jan. 2008 G. Machine specifications DC 24 V (supplied from the main unit) Power requirements DC 5 V (generated within the DF-611) Max. power 60 W or less consumption 618 mm (W) x 575 mm (D) x 130 mm (H) Dimensions 24.25 inch (W) x 22.75 inch (D) x 5 inch (H) Weight...

  • Page 754: Maintenance

    Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jan. 2008 2. Periodical check Maintenance Periodical check Maintenance procedure (Periodical check parts) NOTE • The alcohol described in the cleaning procedure of maintenance represents the isopropyl alcohol. 2.1.1 Pick-up roller/feed roller A. Periodically cleaning parts/cycle •...
  • Page 755 2. Periodical check Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jan. 2008 3. Remove two C-clips [1], the bearing [2] and two springs [3] and remove the pick-up/feed roller assy [4]. A01HF2C002DA 4. Remove the C-ring [1] and the lever [2]. 5. Remove three C-rings [3]. 6.

  • Page 756: Separation Roller

    Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jan. 2008 2. Periodical check 2.1.2 Separation roller A. Periodically cleaning parts/cycle • Separation roller: Every 50,000 prints B. Periodically replaced parts/cycle • Separation roller: Every 200,000 prints C. Cleaning procedure 1. Open the feed cover. See P.16 2.
  • Page 757 2. Periodical check Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jan. 2008 4. Hold the two sides [1] between your fingertips to unhook the spring [2] and remove the separation roller assy [3]. NOTE • When reinstalling the separation roller assy, be sure to hook the spring onto the assy.

  • Page 758: Cleaning Of The Miscellaneous Rolls

    Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jan. 2008 2. Periodical check 2.1.3 Cleaning of the miscellaneous rolls A. Periodically cleaning parts/cycle • Miscellaneous rolls: Every 50,000 prints B. Cleaning procedure 1. Lift up the document feed tray. 2. Using a soft cloth dampened with alcohol, wipe the roll [1].
  • Page 759 2. Periodical check Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jan. 2008 7. While opening the processing guide, remove four screws [1] and remove the transport roll assy [2]. 9J07F2C521DA 8. Using a soft cloth dampened with alcohol, wipe the roll [1]. A01HF2C009DA...

  • Page 760: Cleaning Of The Miscellaneous Rollers

    Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jan. 2008 2. Periodical check 2.1.4 Cleaning of the miscellaneous rollers A. Periodically cleaning parts/cycle • Miscellaneous rollers: Every 50,000 prints B. Cleaning procedure 1. Open the transportation cover. 2. Using a soft cloth dampened with alcohol, wipe the roller [1].
  • Page 761 2. Periodical check Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jan. 2008 6. Using a soft cloth dampened with alcohol, wipe the roller [1]. 9J07F2C524DA 7. Remove two shoulder screws [1] and remove the scanning guide [2]. 9J07F2C535DA 8. While turning processing knob [1], wipe the roller [2] using a soft cloth dampened with alcohol.

  • Page 762: Cleaning Of The Scanning Guide

    Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jan. 2008 2. Periodical check 2.1.5 Cleaning of the scanning guide A. Periodically cleaning parts/cycle • Scanning guide: Every 50,000 prints B. Cleaning procedure 1. Open the reverse automatic document feeder. 2. Open the before scanning mylar assy [1].

  • Page 763: Service Tool

    3. Service tool Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jan. 2008 4. Open the reverse automatic docu- ment feeder. 5. While opening the before scanning mylar assy [1], clean the cloth [2] using a brush or other similar tools. 9J07F2C539DA Service tool CE tool list Tool name Shape...

  • Page 764: Other

    Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jan. 2008 4. Other Other Disassembly/Adjustment prohibited items A. Paint-locked screws NOTE • To prevent loose screws, a screw lock in blue or green series color is applied to the screws. • The screw lock is applied to the screws that may get loose due to the vibrations and loads created by the use of machine or due to the vibrations created during transportation.

  • Page 765: Disassembly/Assembly/Cleaning List (Other Parts)

    4. Other Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jan. 2008 Disassembly/Assembly/Cleaning list (Other parts) 4.2.1 Disassembly/Assembly parts list Section Part name Ref. page Feed cover P.16 Front cover P.17 Exterior parts Rear cover P.18 Document feed tray front cover P.19 Unit Reverse automatic document feeder P.19 DF control board P.21...
  • Page 766 Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jan. 2008 4. Other 3. Remove two shoulder screws [1] and two screws [2]. 4. Open the feed cover [3]. A01HF2C022DA NOTE • In the reinstallation steps, when tightening two screws [1], press the feed cover [3] in the direction of the arrow so as not to leave a clearance between the top of the protrusion from the surface of the feed cover...

  • Page 767: Rear Cover

    4. Other Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jan. 2008 4.3.3 Rear cover 1. Open the reverse automatic docu- ment feeder. NOTE • If the reverse automatic document feeder is set to be lifted up at angles up to 60 degrees due to the set position of the stopper for the hinge, change the set position to the lower side so that the reverse...

  • Page 768: Document Feed Tray Front Cover

    Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jan. 2008 4. Other 4.3.4 Document feed tray front cover 1. Lift up the document feed tray. 2. Remove three screws [1]. A01HF2C027DA 3. Disconnect two connectors [1] and remove the document feed tray front cover [2]. A01HF2C014DA 4.3.5 Reverse automatic document feeder...
  • Page 769 4. Other Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jan. 2008 2. Open the reverse automatic docu- ment feeder. NOTE • If the reverse automatic document feeder is set to be lifted up at angles up to 60 degrees due to the set position of the stopper for the hinge, change the set position to the lower side so that the reverse automatic document feeder can be...

  • Page 770: Df Control Board

    Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jan. 2008 4. Other 4.3.6 DF control board 1. Remove the rear cover. See P.18 2. Disconnect all the fifteen connectors from the DF control board. A01HF2C025DA 3. Remove the screw [1]. 4. Remove four screws [2] and remove the DF control board [3].
  • Page 771 4. Other Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jan. 2008 3. Remove two screws [1] and remove the document width detection vari- able resistor [2]. 9J07F2C531DA A. Reinstallation procedure 1. Open the side edge stop [1] of the original feed tray. 9J07F2C532DA 2.
  • Page 772 Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jan. 2008 4. Other 3. Use two screws [1] to install the doc- ument width detection variable resis- tor [2]. NOTE • Install the gear and rack gear by aligning the arrows. 4. Connect the connector. 5.

  • Page 773: Replacing The Stamp Unit

    4. Other Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jan. 2008 4.3.8 Replacing the stamp unit 1. Open the transportation cover. 2. Lift up the document feed tray. 3. Remove the screw [1] and the mounting plate [2]. NOTE • Be sure to hold the document feed tray to prevent the tray from falling down while removing the mounting plate.

  • Page 774: Replacing The Stamp

    Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jan. 2008 4. Other 5. Remove the cord clamp [1] and dis- connect the connector [2]. 6. Remove the screw [3] and remove the stamp unit [4]. 9J07F2C505DA 4.3.9 Replacing the stamp 1. Lift up the document feed tray [1]. A01HF2C505DA 2.
  • Page 775 4. Other Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jan. 2008 Blank Page...

  • Page 776: Adjustment/Setting

    Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jan. 2008 5. How to use the adjustment section Adjustment/Setting How to use the adjustment section • “Adjustment/Setting” contains detailed information on the adjustment items and proce- dures for this machine. • Throughout this “Adjustment/Setting,” the default settings are indicated by “ ”. Advance checks Before attempting to solve the customer problem, the following advance checks must be made.

  • Page 777: Service Mode

    6. Service Mode Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jan. 2008 Service Mode Service Mode setting procedure See P.338 of the main body service manual. ADF setting procedure 6.2.1 Original Stop Position Functions • To manually adjust the original stop position and the read position in each of the ADF modes.

  • Page 778: Paper Passage

    Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jan. 2008 6. Service Mode C. Main Scanning Direction Functions • To automatically adjust the read position in the Main Scanning Direction. • When ADF has been replaced. Setting/ P.39 procedure 6.2.4 Paper Passage Functions • To check for paper passage through the ADF in each of the ADF modes. •...

  • Page 779: Sensor Check

    6. Service Mode Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jan. 2008 6.2.5 Sensor Check Functions • To check sensors on the paper path. • When a document misfeed occurs. A. Procedure 1. Call the Service Mode to the screen. See P.338 of the main body service manual. 2.
  • Page 780 Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jan. 2008 6. Service Mode C. Sensor check list Operation characteristics/ panel display Symbol Panel display Part/Signal name Feed Open&Close Feed open/close sensor Open Close Read Open&Close Read open/close sensor Open Close Paper Paper not Regist Registration sensor present present...

  • Page 781: Original Tray Width

    6. Service Mode Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jan. 2008 6.2.6 Original Tray Width Functions • To set the values of maximum (A3 position) and minimum (B6 position) widths on the document width detection variable resistor. • When an original misfeed occurs. •...

  • Page 782: Mechanical Adjustment

    Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jan. 2008 7. Mechanical adjustment Mechanical adjustment Adjusting the height NOTE Make this adjustment after any of the following procedures has been performed. • When the reverse automatic document feeder has been reinstalled. 1. Check the clearance between the upper face of scanner and the pro- trusion [1] on the reverse automatic document feeder side (2 spots, front/...

  • Page 783: Adjusting Skew Feed

    7. Mechanical adjustment Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jan. 2008 Adjusting skew feed 1. Check how the edges of the chart are misaligned. The amount of the deviation of the chart will be X. Deviation in + (plus) Deviation in - (minus) 9J07F3C513DA 2.
  • Page 784 Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jan. 2008 7. Mechanical adjustment 7. Loosen the mounting screw [1] on the right hinge viewed from the front. 8. When the difference of the deviation is + (plus), turn the screw [2] coun- terclockwise to adjust. NOTE •...

  • Page 785: Original Stop Position

    7. Mechanical adjustment Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jan. 2008 Original Stop Position • Adjustment of the document stop position is made automatically and manually (by enter- ing numbers). The following adjustment is made in the Service Mode. NOTE • Before performing this adjustment, the feed zoom adjustment needs to be com- plete.
  • Page 786 Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jan. 2008 7. Mechanical adjustment 5. Place the chart [1] in the document feed tray (with the side having an arrow facing up). 6. Press the Start key. A01HF3C516DA 7. Make sure that result is OK. Then, touch [SET].
  • Page 787 7. Mechanical adjustment Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jan. 2008 B. Auto adjust: Sub Scanning Direction 2-Side Stop Position 1. Call the Service Mode to the screen. See P.338 of the main body service manual. 2. Touch [ADF]. 3. Touch [Auto Stop Position Adjustment]. 4.
  • Page 788 Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jan. 2008 7. Mechanical adjustment 7. Make sure that result is OK. Then, touch [SET]. 8. Touch [END]. 9. Touch [Exit] on the Service Mode screen. 10. Turn OFF the main power switch, wait for 10 sec., then turn the switch NOTE If the result is Unable: •...
  • Page 789 7. Mechanical adjustment Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jan. 2008 5. Place the chart [1] in the document feed tray (with the side having an arrow facing up). 6. Press the Start key. A01HF3C516DA 7. Make sure that result is OK. Then, touch [SET].
  • Page 790 Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jan. 2008 7. Mechanical adjustment 3. Check that the difference in the widths of a between the chart and the copy sample falls within the specified range. Specifications: 0 ± 2 mm NOTE • In the same way place the chart with the blank side facing up in the document feed tray in the duplex mode and make a copy.
  • Page 791 7. Mechanical adjustment Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jan. 2008 10. Touch [END]. 11. Touch [Exit] on the Service Mode screen. 12. Turn OFF the main power switch, wait for 10 sec., then turn the switch ON. 13. Make a copy of the chart again and check that the difference in the widths of a falls within the specified range.
  • Page 792 Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jan. 2008 7. Mechanical adjustment 5. Call the Service Mode to the screen. See P.338 of the main body service manual. 6. Touch [ADF]. 7. Touch [Original Stop Position]. A01HF3E525DA 8. Touch [Main Scanning Direction]. 9. Enter the value from the ten-key pad. (Press the [+/-] key to change the +/- code.) •...

  • Page 793: Original Tray Width

    7. Mechanical adjustment Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jan. 2008 Original Tray Width NOTE Make this adjustment after any of the following procedures has been performed. • When the document width detection variable resistor has been replaced. • When the EEPROM has been replaced. 1.
  • Page 794 Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jan. 2008 7. Mechanical adjustment 5. Touch [Max. Width]. 6. Press the Start key. 7. OK is displayed when the adjustment has been completed. A01HF3E534DA 8. Narrow the width across the edge guides [1] by sliding them to the “B6” position.

  • Page 795: Read Pos Adj

    7. Mechanical adjustment Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jan. 2008 Read Pos Adj NOTE Make this adjustment after any of the following procedures has been performed. • When the first/second carriage, the scanner wire, the scanner assy, the original glass moving unit, and/or the glass step sheet have been replaced. A.
  • Page 796 Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jan. 2008 7. Mechanical adjustment 8. Make sure that the result is OK. 9. Touch [END]. 10. Touch [Exit] on the Service Mode screen. 11. Turn OFF the main power switch, wait for 10 sec., then turn the switch NOTE If the result is Unable: •...
  • Page 797 7. Mechanical adjustment Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jan. 2008 7. Touch [Read Pos Adj]. A01HF3E538DA 8. Enter the value using the [-]/[+] keys. • If the difference in the widths of a is greater than the specifications, enter the - value. •...

  • Page 798: Feed Zoom

    Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jan. 2008 7. Mechanical adjustment Feed Zoom • Adjustment of the feed zoom is made automatically and manually (by entering numbers). The following adjustment is made in the Service Mode. A. Auto adjust 1. Call the Service Mode to the screen. See P.338 of the main body service manual.
  • Page 799 7. Mechanical adjustment Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jan. 2008 7. Make sure that result is OK. Then, touch [SET]. 8. Touch [END]. A01HF3E540DA 9. Touch [Exit] on the Service Mode screen. 10. Turn OFF the main power switch, wait for 10 sec., then turn the switch ON. B.
  • Page 800 Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jan. 2008 7. Mechanical adjustment 5. Call the Service Mode to the screen. See P.338 of the main body service manual. 6. Touch [ADF]. 7. Touch [Feed Zoom]. 8. Touch [Orig. Feed Zoom Ad]. A01HF3E533DA 9. Enter the value using the [-]/[+] keys. •...
  • Page 801 7. Mechanical adjustment Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jan. 2008 Blank Page...

  • Page 802: Troubleshooting

    Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jan. 2008 8. Jam display Troubleshooting Jam display Initial check items • When a paper misfeed occurs, first perform the following initial check items. Check item Action Does paper meet product specifications? Replace paper. Replace paper. Is the paper curled, wavy, or damp? Instruct the user on the correct paper storage pro- cedures.

  • Page 803: Misfeed Display Resetting Procedure

    8. Jam display Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jan. 2008 8.2.1 Misfeed display resetting procedure • Open the corresponding cover, clear the sheet of paper misfed, and close the cover. Sensor layout 9J07F4C500DA [1] Exit sensor [4] Registration sensor [2] Reverse registration sensor [5] After separate sensor [3] Before read sensor...

  • Page 804: Solution

    Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jan. 2008 8. Jam display Solution 8.4.1 Turnover section misfeed A. Detection timing Type Description The before read sensor (PS9) is not turned ON after a lapse of a given time after the reverse registration motion is performed. Detection of misfeed at turnover section The reverse registration sensor (PS8) is not turned ON after a lapse of a...

  • Page 805: Transport Section Misfeed

    8. Jam display Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jan. 2008 8.4.3 Transport section misfeed A. Detection timing Type Description The registration sensor (PS3) is not turned ON after a lapse of a given time after the after separate sensor (PS4) is turned ON. Detection of misfeed at transport section The before read sensor (PS9) is not turned ON after a lapse of a given...

  • Page 806: Paper Exit Section Misfeed

    Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jan. 2008 8. Jam display 8.4.4 Paper exit section misfeed A. Detection timing Type Description The exit sensor (PS5) is not turned ON after a lapse of a given time after the before read sensor (PS9) is turned ON. Detection of misfeed at •...

  • Page 807: Image Reading Section Misfeed

    8. Jam display Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jan. 2008 8.4.5 Image reading section misfeed A. Detection timing Type Description The before read sensor (PS9) is not turned OFF after a lapse of a given time after the registration sensor (PS3) is turned OFF. Detection of paper left in image reading section The before read sensor (PS9) is not turned OFF after a lapse of a given...

  • Page 808: Original Feeding Interval Misfeed

    Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jan. 2008 8. Jam display 8.4.6 Original feeding interval misfeed A. Detection timing Type Description Original feeding interval The before read sensor (PS9) is turned ON earlier than a given time after misfeed the before read sensor (PS9) is turned OFF during original transportation. Relevant electrical parts Take-up motor (M2) DF control board (DFCB)

  • Page 809: Trouble Code

    9. Trouble code Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jan. 2008 Trouble code Trouble code list • The main unit’s cpu performs a self-diagnostics function that, on detecting a malfunction, gives the corresponding malfunction code on the touch panel. Code Description Detection timing Rank •...

  • Page 810: Solution

    Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jan. 2008 9. Trouble code Solution 9.2.1 C8101: Pressure/retraction mechanism failure before image reading Relevant electrical parts Reading roller pressure/retraction motor (M4) DF control board (DFCB) Read roller sensor (PS6) WIRING DIAGRAM Location Step Action Control signal (Electrical components) Check the motor and sensor connectors...

  • Page 811: C8103: Lift Up Mechanism Failure

    9. Trouble code Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jan. 2008 9.2.3 C8103: Lift up mechanism failure Relevant electrical parts Lift-up motor (M6) DF control board (DFCB) Lift up lower sensor (PS16) Lift up upper sensor (PS15) WIRING DIAGRAM Location Step Action Control signal (Electrical components)

  • Page 812: C8302: Cooling Fan Failure

    Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jan. 2008 9. Trouble code 9.2.5 C8302: Cooling fan failure Relevant electrical parts Cooling fan (FM1) DF control board (DFCB) WIRING DIAGRAM Location Step Action Control signal (Electrical components) Check the connector of FM1 for proper —...

  • Page 813: 10. Set Error Detection

    10. Set error detection Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jan. 2008 10. Set error detection • When the ADF or cover set error for some reason is detected, the panel of the main unit will have the following display. A01HF4C503DA <Panel display and detection timing for each> Panel Description of Detection start...
  • Page 814 SERVICE MANUAL FIELD SERVICE 2008.01 Ver. 2.0...
  • Page 815 Revision history After publication of this service manual, the parts and mechanism may be subject to change for improvement of their performance. Therefore, the descriptions given in this service manual may not coincide with the actual machine. When any change has been made to the descriptions in the service manual, a revised version will be issued with a revision mark added as required.
  • Page 816 Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jan. 2008 CONTENTS PC-104/204 Outline Product specifications ..................... 1 Maintenance Periodical check ...................... 3 Maintenance procedure (Periodical check parts) ..........3 2.1.1 Replacing the separation roller assy ............. 3 2.1.2 Replacing the feed roller ................5 2.1.3 Replacing the pick-up roller................
  • Page 817 Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jan. 2008 Troubleshooting Jam display ......................23 Misfeed display ....................23 7.1.1 Misfeed display resetting procedure ............23 Sensor layout...................... 24 Solution ......................25 7.3.1 Initial check items ..................25 7.3.2 Tray3 feed section/vertical transport section misfeed (PC-104/204)... 26 7.3.3 Tray4 feed section/vertical transport section misfeed (PC-204)....

  • Page 818: Product Specifications

    Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jan. 2008 1. Product specifications Outline Product specifications A. Type Name 2 way paper feed cabinet Type Front loading type 2 way paper feed device Installation Desk type Document alignment Center B. Paper Capacity Type Size Tray 3 Tray 4 Plain paper...
  • Page 819 1. Product specifications Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jan. 2008 Blank Page...

  • Page 820: Periodical Check

    Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jan. 2008 2. Periodical check Maintenance Periodical check Maintenance procedure (Periodical check parts) 2.1.1 Replacing the separation roller assy A. Periodically replaced parts/cycle • Separation roller assy: Every 300,000 prints NOTE • Replace the separation roller assy, feed roller and pick-up roller at the same time. B.
  • Page 821 2. Periodical check Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jan. 2008 4. Remove two C-rings [1] and the shaft [2], and remove the paper sep- aration roller fixing bracket assy [3]. NOTE • Be careful not to lose spring at this time. A093F2C501DA 5.

  • Page 822: Replacing The Feed Roller

    Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jan. 2008 2. Periodical check 2.1.2 Replacing the feed roller A. Periodically replaced parts/cycle • Feed roller: Every 300,000 prints NOTE • Replace the separation roller assy, feed roller and pick-up roller at the same time. B.
  • Page 823 2. Periodical check Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jan. 2008 6. Remove two screws [1] and remove the mounting frame [2] for the paper separation roller mounting bracket assy. A093F2C004DA 7. Remove two screws [1] and remove the feed roller cover [2]. A093F2C005DA 8.
  • Page 824 Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jan. 2008 2. Periodical check 9. Shift the shaft assy [1] in the orienta- tion as shown on the left, and remove the C-ring [2] and the gear [3]. 4348fs2607c0 10. Remove the C-ring [1], the bushing [2], and remove the shaft assy [3].

  • Page 825: Replacing The Pick-Up Roller

    2. Periodical check Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jan. 2008 12. Remove the C-ring [1] and remove the feed roller [2]. A093F2C531DA 13. Repeat steps 1 to 12 similarly for the 4th drawer. 2.1.3 Replacing the pick-up roller A. Periodically replaced parts/cycle •...
  • Page 826 Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jan. 2008 2. Periodical check 5. Remove four screws [1] and remove the feed unit [2]. A093F2C003DA 6. Remove two screws [1] and remove the mounting frame [2] for the paper separation roller mounting bracket assy. A093F2C004DA 7.
  • Page 827 2. Periodical check Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jan. 2008 8. Remove two C-rings [1], two bush- ings [2], and remove the pick-up roller assy [3]. A093F2C532DA 9. Remove the C-ring [1] and remove the pick-up roller [2]. A093F2C533DA 10. Repeat steps 1 to 9 similarly for the 4th drawer.

  • Page 828: Other

    Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jan. 2008 3. Other Other Disassembly/Adjustment prohibited items A. Paint-locked screws NOTE • To prevent loose screws, a screw lock in blue or green series color is applied to the screws. • The screw lock is applied to the screws that may get loose due to the vibrations and loads created by the use of machine or due to the vibrations created during transportation.

  • Page 829: Disassembly/Assembly/Cleaning List (Other Parts)

    3. Other Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jan. 2008 Disassembly/Assembly/Cleaning list (Other parts) 3.2.1 Disassembly/Assembly parts list Section Part name Ref. page Right door P.13 Rear right cover P.13 Lower right cover P.13 Exterior parts Front right cover P.13 Rear cover P.13 Left cover P.13...

  • Page 830: Disassembly/Assembly Procedure

    Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jan. 2008 3. Other Disassembly/Assembly procedure 3.3.1 Right door/Rear right cover/Lower right cover/Front right cover A093F2C526DA 1. Open the right door [1]. 2. Remove the right door [1]. 3. Remove two screws [2] and remove the rear right cover [3]. 4.

  • Page 831: Cleaning Procedure

    3. Other Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jan. 2008 Cleaning procedure NOTE • The alcohol described in the cleaning procedure represents the isopropyl alcohol. 3.4.1 Separation roller 1. Remove the right door. See P.13 2. Remove two screws [1] and remove the jam access cover [2].

  • Page 832: Feed Roller

    Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jan. 2008 3. Other 3.4.2 Feed roller 1. Remove the tray3. (remove the tray4 from 4th row.) 2. Remove the separation roller mounting bracket assy. See the procedures 1 to 3 in P.14 “Cleaning of the separation roller.” 3.

  • Page 833: Vertical Transport Roller

    3. Other Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jan. 2008 3.4.4 Vertical transport roller 1. Open the right door. 2. Using a cleaning pad dampened with alcohol, wipe the vertical transport roller [1] clean of dirt. A093F2C009DA...

  • Page 834: Adjustment/Setting

    Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jan. 2008 4. How to use the adjustment section Adjustment/Setting How to use the adjustment section • “Adjustment/Setting” contains detailed information on the adjustment items and proce- dures for this machine. • Throughout this “Adjustment/Setting,” the default settings are indicated by “ ”. Advance checks Before attempting to solve the customer problem, the following advance checks must be made.

  • Page 835: Sensor Check

    5. Sensor check Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jan. 2008 Sensor check Check procedure A. Procedure 1. Call the Service Mode to the screen. See P.338 of the main body service manual. 2. Touch [State Confirmation]. 3. Touch [Sensor Check]. 5.1.1 Sensor check screen •...

  • Page 836: Sensor Check List

    Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jan. 2008 5. Sensor check 5.1.2 Sensor check list A. Sensor monitor1 Operation characteris- tics/Panel display Symbol Panel display Part/Signal name Out of PS112 Device Detection Tray3 device detection sensor position Paper not Paper PS115 Paper Empty Tray3 empty sensor present present...

  • Page 837: Mechanical Adjustment

    6. Mechanical adjustment Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jan. 2008 Mechanical adjustment Adjusting the paper reference position NOTE • Make this adjustment after any of the following procedures has been performed. When the PH unit has been replaced. When the image on the print is offset in the sub scan direction. When a faint image occurs on the leading edge of the image.
  • Page 838 Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jan. 2008 6. Mechanical adjustment 8. Slide out the drawer [1] and unload paper from it. 9. Loosen three screws [2] at the center of the paper lifting plate. A093F3C502DA 10. Watching the graduations [1] pro- vided in the drawer, move the edge guide [2] in the rear.
  • Page 839 6. Mechanical adjustment Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jan. 2008 6.1.2 Centering (Duplex 2nd Side) 1. Call the Service Mode to the screen. See P.338 of the main body service manual. 2. Touch [Machine] → [Printer Area]. 3. Touch [Centering (Duplex 2nd Side)] → [3rd.]. A093F3E517DA 4.

  • Page 840: Troubleshooting

    Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jan. 2008 7. Jam display Troubleshooting Jam display Misfeed display • When misfeed occurs, message, misfeed location “Blinking” and paper location “Light- ing” are displayed on the touch panel of the main body. A093F4C500DA Code Misfeed location Misfeed access location Action 1301...

  • Page 841: Sensor Layout

    7. Jam display Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jan. 2008 Sensor layout A093F4C504DA [1] Sensor in front of tim. roller (PS23) [4] Tray3 paper feed sensor (PS116) [2] Paper feed tray 2 vertical transport sensor [5] Tray4 vertical transport sensor (PS126) (PS16) [3] Tray3 vertical transport sensor (PS117) [6] Tray4 paper feed sensor (PS125)

  • Page 842: Solution

    Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jan. 2008 7. Jam display Solution 7.3.1 Initial check items • When a paper misfeed occurs, first perform the following initial check items. Check item Action Does paper meet product specifications? Replace paper. Replace paper. Is the paper curled, wavy, or damp? Instruct the user on the correct paper storage procedures.

  • Page 843: Tray3 Feed Section/Vertical Transport Section Misfeed (Pc-104/204)

    Step Action Control signal (Electrical components) Initial check items — — bizhub C353/C253/C203 PS23 I/O check, sensor check PRCB CN1-3 (ON) D-18 PC-104, PC-204 PS116 I/O check, sensor check PCCB PJ6-8 (ON) B-1 to 2 PS117 I/O check, sensor check...

  • Page 844: Tray4 Feed Section/Vertical Transport Section Misfeed (Pc-204)

    Step Action Control signal (Electrical components) Initial check items — — bizhub C353/C253/ PS23 I/O check, sensor check PRCB CN1-3 (ON) C203 D-18 PS125 I/O check, sensor check PCCB PJ10-8 (ON) PC-204 G-5 PS126 I/O check, sensor check PCCB PJ11-2 (ON)

  • Page 845: Trouble Code

    8. Trouble code Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jan. 2008 Trouble code Trouble code display • The main unit’s CPU performs a self-diagnostics function that, on detecting a malfunc- tion, gives the corresponding malfunction code on the touch panel. A093F4E506DA Trouble code list Code Item Description...

  • Page 846: Solution

    Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jan. 2008 8. Trouble code Solution 8.3.1 C0206: Tray3 lift-up failure C0208: Tray4 lift-up failure Relevant electrical parts Tray3 lift-up motor (M124) PC control board (PCCB) Tray4 lift-up motor (M125) MFP board (MFPB) Tray3 upper limit sensor (PS114) DC power supply (DCPU) Tray4 upper limit sensor (PS123) WIRING DIAGRAM...
  • Page 847 8. Trouble code Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jan. 2008 Blank Page...
  • Page 848 SERVICE MANUAL FIELD SERVICE 2008.01 Ver. 3.0...
  • Page 849 Revision history After publication of this service manual, the parts and mechanism may be subject to change for improvement of their performance. Therefore, the descriptions given in this service manual may not coincide with the actual machine. When any change has been made to the descriptions in the service manual, a revised version will be issued with a revision mark added as required.
  • Page 850 Field Service Ver. 3.0 Jan. 2008 CONTENTS PC-405 Outline Product specification ....................1 Maintenance Periodical check ...................... 3 Maintenance procedure (Periodical check parts) ..........3 2.1.1 Replacing the separation roller assy ............. 3 2.1.2 Replacing the feed roller ................5 2.1.3 Replacing the pick-up roller................
  • Page 851 Field Service Ver. 3.0 Jan. 2008 6.1.2 Centering (Duplex 2nd Side) ..............26 Shifter movement timing belt adjustment ............27 Troubleshooting Jam display ......................29 Misfeed display ....................29 7.1.1 Misfeed display resetting procedure ............29 Sensor layout...................... 30 Solution ......................31 7.3.1 Initial check items ..................

  • Page 852: Product Specification

    Field Service Ver. 3.0 Jan. 2008 1. Product specification Outline Product specification A. Type Name Large capacity cabinet Type Front loading type LCC Installation Desk type Document alignment Center B. Paper Type Size Capacity Plain paper 2,500 sheets (60 to 90 g/m (16 to 24 lb)) Thick paper 1 (91 to 150 g/m...
  • Page 853 1. Product specification Field Service Ver. 3.0 Jan. 2008 Blank Page...

  • Page 854: Periodical Check

    Field Service Ver. 3.0 Jan. 2008 2. Periodical check Maintenance Periodical check Maintenance procedure (Periodical check parts) 2.1.1 Replacing the separation roller assy A. Periodically replaced parts/cycle • Separation roller assy: Every 300,000 prints NOTE • Replace the separation roller assy, feed roller and pick-up roller at the same time. B.
  • Page 855 2. Periodical check Field Service Ver. 3.0 Jan. 2008 4. Remove the C-ring [1], the guide [2], and remove the separation roller assy [3]. A093F2C502DA NOTE • Install the separation roller assy while pressing the holder down so that it aligns to the metal bracket of the machine.

  • Page 856: Replacing The Feed Roller

    Field Service Ver. 3.0 Jan. 2008 2. Periodical check 2.1.2 Replacing the feed roller A. Periodically replaced parts/cycle • Feed roller: Every 300,000 prints NOTE • Replace the separation roller assy, feed roller and pick-up roller at the same time. B.
  • Page 857 2. Periodical check Field Service Ver. 3.0 Jan. 2008 6. Remove two screws [1] and remove the mounting frame [2] for the sepa- ration roller mounting bracket assy. A093F2C011DA 7. Remove two screws [1] and remove the paper feed roller cover [2]. A093F2C012DA 8.
  • Page 858 Field Service Ver. 3.0 Jan. 2008 2. Periodical check 9. Shift the shaft assy [1] in the orienta- tion as shown on the left, and remove the C-ring [2] and the gear [3]. 10. Remove the shaft assy [1]. 4348fs2506c0 11.

  • Page 859: Replacing The Pick-Up Roller

    2. Periodical check Field Service Ver. 3.0 Jan. 2008 2.1.3 Replacing the pick-up roller A. Periodically replaced parts/cycle • Pick-up roller: Every 300,000 prints NOTE • Replace the separation roller assy, feed roller and pick-up roller at the same time. B.
  • Page 860 Field Service Ver. 3.0 Jan. 2008 2. Periodical check 6. Remove two screws [1] and remove the mounting frame [2] for the sepa- ration roller mounting bracket assy. A093F2C011DA 7. Remove two screws [1] and remove the paper feed roller cover [2]. A093F2C012DA 8.

  • Page 861: Other

    3. Other Field Service Ver. 3.0 Jan. 2008 Other Disassembly/adjustment prohibited items A. Paint-locked screws NOTE • To prevent loose screws, a screw lock in blue or green series color is applied to the screws. • The screw lock is applied to the screws that may get loose due to the vibrations and loads created by the use of machine or due to the vibrations created during transportation.

  • Page 862: Disassembly/Assembly/Cleaning List (Other Parts)

    Field Service Ver. 3.0 Jan. 2008 3. Other Disassembly/Assembly/Cleaning list (Other parts) 3.2.1 Disassembly/Assembly parts list Section Part name Ref. page Right door P.12 Rear right cover P.12 Lower right cover P.12 Exterior parts Front right cover P.12 Rear cover P.12 Left cover P.12...

  • Page 863: Disassembly/Assembly Procedure

    3. Other Field Service Ver. 3.0 Jan. 2008 Disassembly/Assembly procedure 3.3.1 Right door/Rear right cover/Lower right cover/Front right cover A093F2C519DA 1. Open the right door [1]. 2. Remove the right door [1]. 3. Remove two screws [2] and remove the rear right cover [3]. 4.

  • Page 864: Drawer

    Field Service Ver. 3.0 Jan. 2008 3. Other 3.3.3 Drawer 1. Insert a driver into the hole [1] at the back of the feed tray and pull out the paper feed tray. A093F2C509DA 2. Remove the paper. 3. Remove two screws [1], the connec- tor [2], and remove the connector board [3].

  • Page 865: Wire

    3. Other Field Service Ver. 3.0 Jan. 2008 3.3.4 Wire 1. Remove the drawer. See P.13 2. Remove four screws [1] and discon- nect the connector [2], and remove the front cover assy [3]. A093F2C511DB 3. Remove two screws [1] and the inner cover assy [2].
  • Page 866 Field Service Ver. 3.0 Jan. 2008 3. Other 5. Remove three screws [1] and remove the driver mounting plate assy [2]. A093F2C514DA NOTE • When assembling, be sure to engage rib of gear 1 [1] with convex section of gear 2 [2]. A093F2C515DA 6.
  • Page 867 3. Other Field Service Ver. 3.0 Jan. 2008 7. Remove two C-clips [1]. 8. Remove four pulley covers [2]. 9. Unhook four pulleys [3]. A093F2C517DA 10. Remove the ground plate [1]. 11. Remove four cable holding jigs [2] and remove the main drawer [3]. NOTE •...
  • Page 868 Field Service Ver. 3.0 Jan. 2008 3. Other 13. Remove four screws [1] and remove the front trailing edge assy [2]. A093F2C522DA 14. Remove three C-rings [1], the bush- ing [2], and two gears [3]. 15. Remove the feed drum assy [4]. A093F2C523DA 16.

  • Page 869: Cleaning Procedure

    3. Other Field Service Ver. 3.0 Jan. 2008 Cleaning procedure NOTE • The alcohol described in the cleaning procedure represents the isopropyl alcohol. 3.4.1 Separation roller 1. Remove the right door. See P.12 2. Remove two screws [1] and separa- tion roller mounting bracket assy [2].

  • Page 870: Pick-Up Roller

    Field Service Ver. 3.0 Jan. 2008 3. Other 2. Remove two screws [1] and separa- tion roller mounting bracket assy [2]. A093F2C500DA 3. Using a cleaning pad dampened with alcohol, wipe the feed roller [1] clean of dirt. A093F2C015DA 3.4.3 Pick-up roller 1.

  • Page 871: Vertical Transport Roller

    3. Other Field Service Ver. 3.0 Jan. 2008 2. Remove two screws [1] and separa- tion roller mounting bracket assy [2]. A093F2C500DA 3. Using a cleaning pad dampened with alcohol, wipe the pick-up roller [1] clean of dirt. A093F2C014DA 3.4.4 Vertical transport roller 1.

  • Page 872: Adjustment/Setting

    Field Service Ver. 3.0 Jan. 2008 4. How to use the adjustment section Adjustment/Setting How to use the adjustment section • “Adjustment/Setting” contains detailed information on the adjustment items and proce- dures for this machine. • Throughout this “Adjustment/Setting,” the default settings are indicated by “ ”. Advance checks Before attempting to solve the customer problem, the following advance checks must be made.

  • Page 873: Sensor Check

    5. Sensor check Field Service Ver. 3.0 Jan. 2008 Sensor check Check procedure A. Procedure 1. Call the Service Mode to the screen. See P.338 of the main body service manual. 2. Touch [State Confirmation]. 3. Touch [Sensor Check]. 4. Touch [ ]once. 5.1.1 Sensor check screen •...

  • Page 874: Sensor Check List

    Field Service Ver. 3.0 Jan. 2008 5. Sensor check 5.1.2 Sensor check list Sensor monitor 2 Operation characteristics/ panel display Symbol Panel display Part/Signal name Raised Lift-Up Upper Lift-up upper sensor Not raised Position Lowered PS13 Lift-Up Lower Lift-up lower sensor Not lowered Position PS12...

  • Page 875: Mechanical Adjustment

    6. Mechanical adjustment Field Service Ver. 3.0 Jan. 2008 Mechanical adjustment Adjusting the paper reference position NOTE • Make this adjustment after any of the following procedures has been performed. When the PH unit has been replaced. When the image on the print is offset in the sub scan direction. When a faint image occurs on the leading edge of the image.
  • Page 876 Field Service Ver. 3.0 Jan. 2008 6. Mechanical adjustment 8. Press the drawer release button [1] and then slide out the drawer [2] from the paper feed cabinet. A093F3C506DA 9. Open the right door. 10. Loosen the adjustment screw [1] and turn screw D [2] to make the adjust- ment.
  • Page 877 6. Mechanical adjustment Field Service Ver. 3.0 Jan. 2008 6.1.2 Centering (Duplex 2nd Side) 1. Call the Service Mode to the screen. See P.338 of the main body service manual. 2. Touch [Machine] → [Printer Area]. 3. Touch [Centering (Duplex 2nd Side)] → [3rd.]. A093F3E515DA 4.

  • Page 878: Shifter Movement Timing Belt Adjustment

    Field Service Ver. 3.0 Jan. 2008 6. Mechanical adjustment Shifter movement timing belt adjustment 1. Remove the drawer. See P.13 2. While raising the main tray [1], remove the screw [2] and the con- nector cover [3]. A093F3C001DA 3. While raising the main tray [1], remove two screws [2] that hold the shift tray in position.
  • Page 879 6. Mechanical adjustment Field Service Ver. 3.0 Jan. 2008 5. Push the tab [1] of the shift tray [2] as shown on the left and release the lock. 6. Remove the shift tray [2]. A093F3C511DA 7. Loosen the screw [1] fixing the ten- sion pulley assy as shown on the left and move it in the direction of the arrow.

  • Page 880: Troubleshooting

    Field Service Ver. 3.0 Jan. 2008 7. Jam display Troubleshooting Jam display Misfeed display • When misfeed occurs, message, misfeed location “Blinking” and paper location “Light- ing” are displayed on the touch panel of the main body. A093F4C503DA Code Misfeed location Misfeed access location Action 1501...

  • Page 881: Sensor Layout

    7. Jam display Field Service Ver. 3.0 Jan. 2008 Sensor layout A093F4C505DA [1] Sensor in front of tim. roller PS23 [3] Vertical transport sensor [2] Paper feed tray 2 vertical trans- PS16 [4] Paper feed sensor port sensor...

  • Page 882: Solution

    Field Service Ver. 3.0 Jan. 2008 7. Jam display Solution 7.3.1 Initial check items • When a paper misfeed occurs, first perform the following initial check items. Check item Action Does paper meet product specifications? Replace paper. Replace paper. Is the paper curled, wavy, or damp? Instruct the user on the correct paper storage procedures.

  • Page 883: Lct Paper Feed Section/Vertical Transport Section Misfeed

    Step Action Control signal (Electrical components) Initial check items — — bizhub C353/C253/ PS23 I/O check, sensor check PRCB CN1-3 (ON) C203 D-18 PS1 I/O check, sensor check PCCB PJ5-2 (ON) PC-405 F-9 PS2 I/O check, sensor check PCCB PJ5-5 (ON)

  • Page 884: Trouble Code

    Field Service Ver. 3.0 Jan. 2008 8. Trouble code Trouble code Trouble code display • The main unit’s CPU performs a self-diagnostics function that, on detecting a malfunc- tion, gives the corresponding malfunction code on the touch panel. A093F4E507DA...

  • Page 885: Trouble Code List

    8. Trouble code Field Service Ver. 3.0 Jan. 2008 Trouble code list Code Item Description C0001 LCT communication error • Due to a software malfunction, etc., the time on the watchdog timer has run out and a reset is performed. C0102 LCT vertical transport motor mal- •...
  • Page 886 Field Service Ver. 3.0 Jan. 2008 8. Trouble code Code Item Description C0214 LCT shifting failure • The shift tray stop sensor (PS11) is not blocked even after the set period of time has elapsed after the shift operation began (shift to the right). •...

  • Page 887: Solution

    8. Trouble code Field Service Ver. 3.0 Jan. 2008 Solution 8.3.1 C0001: LCT communication error Relevant electrical parts PC control board (PCCB) WIRING DIAGRAM Location Step Action Control signal (Electrical components) Turn OFF the main power switch, wait for 10 sec. or more, and turn ON the main —...

  • Page 888: C0210: Lct Lift Failure

    Field Service Ver. 3.0 Jan. 2008 8. Trouble code 8.3.3 C0210: LCT lift failure Relevant electrical parts Lift-up upper sensor (PS4) PC control board (PCCB) Lift-up lower sensor (PS13) Elevator motor pulse sensor (PS10) Lower over run sensor (PS7) WIRING DIAGRAM Location Step Action...

  • Page 889: C0213: Lct Shift Gate Operation Failure

    8. Trouble code Field Service Ver. 3.0 Jan. 2008 8.3.5 C0213: LCT shift gate operation failure Relevant electrical parts Division board position sensor (PS14) PC control board (PCCB) Division board position motor (M3) WIRING DIAGRAM Location Step Action Control signal (Electrical components) Check the motor and sensor connectors for...

  • Page 890: C0215: Lct Shift Motor Failure

    Field Service Ver. 3.0 Jan. 2008 8. Trouble code 8.3.7 C0215: LCT shift motor failure Relevant electrical parts Shift motor (M4) PC control board (PCCB) Shift motor pulse sensor (PS8) WIRING DIAGRAM Location Step Action Control signal (Electrical components) Check the motor and sensor connectors for proper connection, and correct as neces- —...
  • Page 891 8. Trouble code Field Service Ver. 3.0 Jan. 2008 Blank Page...
  • Page 892 SERVICE MANUAL FIELD SERVICE 2008.01 Ver. 3.0...
  • Page 893 Revision history After publication of this service manual, the parts and mechanism may be subject to change for improvement of their performance. Therefore, the descriptions given in this service manual may not coincide with the actual machine. When any change has been made to the descriptions in the service manual, a revised version will be issued with a revision mark added as required.
  • Page 894 Field Service Ver. 3.0 Jan. 2008 CONTENTS FS-519/PK-515/OT-602 Outline Product specifications ..................... 1 FS-519 ........................1 PK-515........................4 OT-602 ........................5 Maintenance Periodical check ...................... 7 Maintenance procedure (Periodical check parts) ..........7 2.1.1 Replacing the paddles .................. 7 2.1.2 Replacing the cleaning pad.................
  • Page 895 Field Service Ver. 3.0 Jan. 2008 3.4.14 Height and angle adjustment of stand table ..........34 3.4.15 Stapler unit....................36 3.4.16 Punch kit (PK-515): Option ................. 37 3.4.17 Exit roller motor/Storage paddle drive clutch/Exit upper roller/ Storage paddle ................... 38 3.4.18 Exit paddle drive clutch/Exit lower roller .............
  • Page 896 Field Service Ver. 3.0 Jan. 2008 8.3.4 Exit section misfeed ..................77 8.3.5 Finisher bundle exit misfeed................ 77 8.3.6 Finisher staple misfeed ................78 8.3.7 Finisher punch misfeed (PK-515)..............78 Malfunction code ....................79 Trouble code ....................... 79 Solution....................... 81 9.2.1 C1004: FNS communication error...............
  • Page 897 Field Service Ver. 3.0 Jan. 2008 Blank Page...

  • Page 898: Product Specifications

    Field Service Ver. 3.0 Jan. 2008 1. Product specifications Outline Product specifications FS-519 A. Type Name Multi staple finisher built into the copier Installation Installed in the copier Document alignment Center Consumables Staples B. Functions Sort, group, sort offset, group offset, sort stable, and punch (when PK-515 is Modes mounted) C.
  • Page 899 1. Product specifications Field Service Ver. 3.0 Jan. 2008 (2) Sort offset/group offset Type Size Weight Max. capacity Exit 200 sheets tray1 A5, B5S/B5, A4S/A4, B4, A3 Plain paper x 11S/8- x 11, 1000 A4S, 8- x 11S 60 to 90 g/m Recycled x 14, 11 x 17 sheets...
  • Page 900 Field Service Ver. 3.0 Jan. 2008 1. Product specifications D. Stapling Staple filling mode Dedicated staple cartridge (5000 staples) Staple detection Available (Nearly Empty: 20 remaining staples) Back of the corner (30 degree) A4, A3, B5, B4 x 11, 11 x 17 Front of the corner (30 degree) Back of the corner (Parallel) A4S, B5S, A5...
  • Page 901 1. Product specifications Field Service Ver. 3.0 Jan. 2008 PK-515 A. Type Name Punch kit PK-515 Installation Built into the finisher Metric B5S, A4, B4, A3 Inch (2 holes) 8- x 11S/8- x 11, 8- x 14, 11 x 17 Paper size Inch (3 holes) 8- x 11, 11 x 17...
  • Page 902 Field Service Ver. 3.0 Jan. 2008 1. Product specifications OT-602 A. Type Name Output tray OT-602 Installation Fixed to the finisher Sort, group, and sort stable Mode Sort, group, sort offset, group offset, and sort stable Number of bins 1 bin Document alignment Center B.
  • Page 903 1. Product specifications Field Service Ver. 3.0 Jan. 2008 C. Machine specifications 282 mm (W) x 368 mm (D) x 57 mm (H) Dimensions 11 inch (W) x 14.5 inch (D) x 2.25 inch (H) Weight 0.7 kg (1.5 lb) D.

  • Page 904: Periodical Check

    Field Service Ver. 3.0 Jan. 2008 2. Periodical check Maintenance Periodical check Maintenance procedure (Periodical check parts) NOTE • The alcohol described in the cleaning procedure of maintenance represents the isopropyl alcohol. 2.1.1 Replacing the paddles A. Periodically replaced parts/cycle •...
  • Page 905 2. Periodical check Field Service Ver. 3.0 Jan. 2008 3. Loosen two screws [1] and remove the paddle holder assy [2]. A01GF2C555DA 4. Remove two paddles [1] [2] and replace them with new ones. NOTE • When installing new paddles, be sure to install the paddle covered with black film [1] and the paddle covered with transparent film [2] to...
  • Page 906 Field Service Ver. 3.0 Jan. 2008 2. Periodical check 6. Secure the paddle holder assy by tightening two screws [1]. NOTE • When tightening the two set screws, lightly press the paddle so that it is fixed without any tilt. •...

  • Page 907: Replacing The Cleaning Pad

    2. Periodical check Field Service Ver. 3.0 Jan. 2008 2.1.2 Replacing the cleaning pad A. Periodically replaced parts/cycle • Cleaning pad: Every 800,000 prints B. Procedure 1. Remove the finisher unit. See P.28 2. Remove the screw [1] and remove the cleaning pad [2].

  • Page 908: Lubricating The Worm Gear And Replacing The Cover Film

    Field Service Ver. 3.0 Jan. 2008 2. Periodical check 2.1.3 Lubricating the worm gear and replacing the cover film A. Periodically lubricated parts/cycle • Worm gear: Every 800,000 prints B. Periodically replaced parts/cycle • Cover film: Every 800,000 prints C. Procedure NOTE •...
  • Page 909 2. Periodical check Field Service Ver. 3.0 Jan. 2008 5. Remove three screws [1] and remove the elevator motor assy [2]. NOTE • Remove the elevator motor assy while holding the lower part of the tray [3] with your hand. A01GF2C561DA NOTE •...
  • Page 910 Field Service Ver. 3.0 Jan. 2008 2. Periodical check NOTE • Before attaching a new cover film, clean the metal surface where the new cover film is attached. • Align the right ends of the new cover film and the metal as shown in the illustration.

  • Page 911: Cleaning Of The Rollers And Rolls

    2. Periodical check Field Service Ver. 3.0 Jan. 2008 2.1.4 Cleaning of the rollers and rolls A. Periodically cleaning parts/cycle • Rollers and rolls: Every 300,000 prints B. Procedure 1. Remove the finisher unit. See P.28 2. Remove the finisher unit upper cover. See P.21 3.
  • Page 912 Field Service Ver. 3.0 Jan. 2008 2. Periodical check 5. Remove punch waste storage box FN3.1 [1]. (only when PK-515 is installed) A01GF2C523DA 6. Lower processing guide FN3 [1]. 7. While turning processing knob FN2 [2], wipe the roll [3] using a soft cloth dampened with alcohol.

  • Page 913: Cleaning Of The Paddles

    2. Periodical check Field Service Ver. 3.0 Jan. 2008 10. While turning processing knob FN6 [1], wipe the roller [2] using a soft cloth dampened with alcohol. A01GF2C525DA 2.1.5 Cleaning of the paddles A. Periodically cleaning parts/cycle • Paddles: Every 300,000 prints B.

  • Page 914: Other

    Field Service Ver. 3.0 Jan. 2008 3. Other Other Disassembly/adjustment prohibited items A. Paint-locked screws NOTE • To prevent loose screws, a screw lock in blue or green series color is applied to the screws. • The screw lock is applied to the screws that may get loose due to the vibrations and loads created by the use of machine or due to the vibrations created during transportation.

  • Page 915: Precautions To Be Observed When Option Configuration Is Changed

    3. Other Field Service Ver. 3.0 Jan. 2008 Precautions to be observed when option configuration is changed • The exit tray detection position must be changed depending on configuration of the options mounted on the copier. 3.2.1 Setting the exit tray detection position A.

  • Page 916: Disassembly/Assembly/Cleaning List (Other Parts)

    Field Service Ver. 3.0 Jan. 2008 3. Other Disassembly/Assembly/Cleaning list (Other parts) 3.3.1 Disassembly/Assembly parts list Section Part name Ref. page Finisher unit right front cover P.20 Finisher unit left front cover P.20 Finisher unit rear cover P.20 Finisher unit upper cover P.21 Front door P.21...

  • Page 917: Disassembly/Assembly Procedure

    3. Other Field Service Ver. 3.0 Jan. 2008 Disassembly/Assembly procedure 3.4.1 Finisher unit right front cover 1. Open the front door. 2. Remove two screws [1] and remove the finisher unit right front cover [2]. NOTE • At reinstallation, first fit the tab [3] into position.

  • Page 918: Finisher Unit Upper Cover

    Field Service Ver. 3.0 Jan. 2008 3. Other 3.4.4 Finisher unit upper cover 1. Remove the finisher unit. See P.28 2. Remove the finisher unit rear cover. See P.20 3. Remove three screws [1] and remove the finisher unit upper cover [2].

  • Page 919: Middle Guide

    3. Other Field Service Ver. 3.0 Jan. 2008 3.4.6 Middle guide 1. Remove the finisher unit. See P.28 2. Remove the finisher unit rear cover. See P.20 3. Remove the finisher unit upper cover. See P.21 4. Remove the harness bundle [1] from three harness guides [2].

  • Page 920: Intake Cover

    Field Service Ver. 3.0 Jan. 2008 3. Other 3.4.7 Intake cover 1. Remove the finisher unit. See P.28 2. Remove the finisher unit rear cover. See P.20 3. Remove the finisher unit upper cover. See P.21 4. Remove the C-ring [1]. 5.

  • Page 921: Tray 1/Tray 2

    3. Other Field Service Ver. 3.0 Jan. 2008 3.4.9 Tray 1/Tray 2 1. Remove two screws [1], and remove the tray 1 [2]. 2. Remove two screws [3], and remove the tray 2 [4]. A01GF2C502DA 3.4.10 Output tray (OT-602): Option 1.

  • Page 922: Tray Unit

    Field Service Ver. 3.0 Jan. 2008 3. Other 3.4.11 Tray unit NOTE • When removing the tray unit, set the tray unit to its home position. • If the exit tray (OT-602) is installed, remove it in advance. See P.24 1.
  • Page 923 3. Other Field Service Ver. 3.0 Jan. 2008 5. Disconnect three connectors [1] and remove the screw [2], and the ground wire. A01GF2C569DA 6. Remove two shoulder screws [1]. NOTE • When the output tray (OT-602) is mounted, remove the screw [2] and remove the mounting holder [3].
  • Page 924 Field Service Ver. 3.0 Jan. 2008 3. Other 8. Position the stopper [2] as shown and secure it with the screw [1]. A01GF2C571DA 9. Remove two screws [1] and remove the mounting bracket [2]. A01GF2C510DA 10. Remove four screws [1]. A01GF2C565DA...

  • Page 925: Finisher Unit

    3. Other Field Service Ver. 3.0 Jan. 2008 11. Pull the lock release lever [1] and remove the tray unit. NOTE • Make sure the height and angle adjustment of stand table when installing the finisher. See P.34 A01GF2C512DA 3.4.12 Finisher unit 1.

  • Page 926: Changing The Height Of The Stand Table

    Field Service Ver. 3.0 Jan. 2008 3. Other 3.4.13 Changing the height of the stand table 1. Remove four covers [5] while remov- ing four latches [1], [2], [3], and [4]. A01GF2C579DA 2. Remove seven screws [1] to remove the upper unit (rear) for the stand table [2].
  • Page 927 3. Other Field Service Ver. 3.0 Jan. 2008 4. Remove two screws [1] to remove the mounting plate [2]. A01GF2C582DA 5. Remove eight screws [1] to remove two supports [2]. A01GF2C583DA 6. Set the mounting plate [1] which was removed in step 4, and tighten two screws [2].
  • Page 928 Field Service Ver. 3.0 Jan. 2008 3. Other 7. Mount the stand table upper unit (front) [1] which was removed in step 3, and tighten five screws [2]. NOTE • Use care since the lengths of the screws (*) shown on the illustration are different from other screws.
  • Page 929 3. Other Field Service Ver. 3.0 Jan. 2008 10. Mount four adjusting plates [1] fur- nished with the main body. A01GF2C588DA 11. Remove four screws [1] and remove the lower unit for the stand table [2]. A01GF2C589DA 12. Mount the stand table [1] to the main body, and tighten it with four screws [2].
  • Page 930 Field Service Ver. 3.0 Jan. 2008 3. Other 13. Mount the lower unit for the stand table [1] which was removed in step 11, and tighten four screws [2]. A01GF2C591DA 14. Mount two covers [1] which were removed in step 1. A01GF2C592DA 15.

  • Page 931: Height And Angle Adjustment Of Stand Table

    3. Other Field Service Ver. 3.0 Jan. 2008 3.4.14 Height and angle adjustment of stand table 1. Measure the width of X on front and back side. Specifications: 5 ± 2 mm 2. Following adjustment is necessary when the width does not fall within the specifications.
  • Page 932 Field Service Ver. 3.0 Jan. 2008 3. Other 6. Measure the width of Y and Z (clear- ance of the exterior parts) on front and back side. Specifications: Y = Z - 1 mm (Y must be smaller than Z) Z = 7 ±...

  • Page 933: Stapler Unit

    3. Other Field Service Ver. 3.0 Jan. 2008 3.4.15 Stapler unit 1. Open the front door. 2. Turn the dial [1], and move the sta- pler forward. 3. Remove the staple cartridge. 4. Remove the screw [2], and remove the cover [3]. 9J08F2C518DA 5.

  • Page 934: Punch Kit (Pk-515): Option

    Field Service Ver. 3.0 Jan. 2008 3. Other 3.4.16 Punch kit (PK-515): Option 1. Remove the finisher unit. See P.28 2. Remove the finisher unit rear cover. See P.20 3. Remove the finisher unit upper cover. See P.21 4. Remove the finisher unit right front cover. See P.20 5.

  • Page 935: Exit Roller Motor/Storage Paddle Drive Clutch/Exit Upper Roller/Storage Paddle

    3. Other Field Service Ver. 3.0 Jan. 2008 7. Remove ten screws [1] and remove the punch kit [2]. 9J08F2C552DA 3.4.17 Exit roller motor/Storage paddle drive clutch/Exit upper roller/Storage pad- 1. Remove the finisher unit. See P.28 2. Remove the finisher unit left front cover. See P.20 3.
  • Page 936 Field Service Ver. 3.0 Jan. 2008 3. Other 5. Remove two screws [1] and remove the exit roller motor [2]. A01GF2C535DA 6. Remove the E-ring [1]. 4349F2C522DA 7. Loosen two hexagonal socket head screws [1], and remove the storage paddle drive clutch assy [2]. 4349F2C523DA...
  • Page 937 3. Other Field Service Ver. 3.0 Jan. 2008 NOTE • When installing the storage paddle drive clutch, insert the hexagonal wrench into the flame notch [1], and confirm that the storage paddle drive axis [2] fits to the 2 mm-hole [3].
  • Page 938 Field Service Ver. 3.0 Jan. 2008 3. Other 8. Remove the C-ring [1] and the bush- ing [2]. 9J08F2C544DA 9. Remove two C-rings [1] and two bushings [2]. 9J08F2C545DA 10. Remove four screws [1] and remove the exit transportation section (upper) assy [2].
  • Page 939 3. Other Field Service Ver. 3.0 Jan. 2008 11. Remove two C-rings [1] and two bearings [2], and remove the exit upper roller assy [3]. 9J08F2C547DA 12. Remove the C-ring [1] and the bush- ing [2], and remove the storage pad- dle assy [3].

  • Page 940: Exit Paddle Drive Clutch/Exit Lower Roller

    Field Service Ver. 3.0 Jan. 2008 3. Other 14. Disassemble the pressure/retraction system units 9J08F2C036DA 3.4.18 Exit paddle drive clutch/Exit lower roller 1. Remove the finisher unit. See P.28 2. Remove the finisher unit left front cover. See P.20 3. Remove the gear [1] and the bushing [2].
  • Page 941 3. Other Field Service Ver. 3.0 Jan. 2008 6. Loosen two hexagonal socket head screws [1], and remove the exit pad- dle drive clutch assy [2]. 9J08F2C537DA 7. Remove the C-ring [1] and the bear- ing [2]. 8. Remove the gear [3], C-ring [4] and bearing [5].
  • Page 942 Field Service Ver. 3.0 Jan. 2008 3. Other NOTE • When installing the exit paddle drive clutch assy, adjust the dis- tance between the bushing [1] and the exit paddle drive clutch [2] to 0.2 mm and tighten two hexagonal socket head screws.

  • Page 943: Aligning Section

    3. Other Field Service Ver. 3.0 Jan. 2008 3.4.19 Aligning section 1. Remove the finisher unit left front cover. See P.20 2. Remove the finisher unit rear cover. See P.20 3. Remove the finisher unit upper cover. See P.21 4. Remove the exit transportation section (upper) assy. See P.38 5.
  • Page 944 Field Service Ver. 3.0 Jan. 2008 3. Other 10. Remove the wire saddle [1] and dis- connect two connectors [2]. 11. Remove the ground wire from the harness guide [3]. 9J08F2C011DA 12. Remove the harness bundle [1] from the harness guide [2]. 9J08F2C012DA 13.
  • Page 945 3. Other Field Service Ver. 3.0 Jan. 2008 14. Remove the knob [1] of FN5 and remove two gears [2]. 9J08F2C539DA 15. Remove three screws [1] and bush- ing [2], and remove the gear assy [3]. 9J08F2C014DA NOTE • When installing the gear assy, fit the mounting plate [1] to the caulk- ing axis [2], and tightening with screw.

  • Page 946: Elevator Motor/Timing Belt

    Field Service Ver. 3.0 Jan. 2008 3. Other 16. Remove the C-ring [1] and remove the gear [2]. 9J08F2C540DA 17. Remove two screws [1] and two shoulder screws [2], and remove the aligning plate assy [3]. 9J08F2C015DA 3.4.20 Elevator motor/Timing belt A.
  • Page 947 3. Other Field Service Ver. 3.0 Jan. 2008 6. Remove three screws [1] and remove the elevator motor assy [2]. A01GF2C534DA 7. Remove the C-ring [1] and remove the gear cover [2]. A01GF2C537DA 8. Remove two screws [1] and remove the metal bracket [2].
  • Page 948 Field Service Ver. 3.0 Jan. 2008 3. Other 9. Remove the C-ring [1] and remove the gear (upper rear) [2] and belt [3]. A01GF2C539DA 10. Remove two screws [1] and remove elevator mounting plate (rear) [2]. [2 ] A01GF2C540DA 11. Remove two screws [1] and remove the belt holder [2].
  • Page 949 3. Other Field Service Ver. 3.0 Jan. 2008 13. Remove the lever [1]. 9J08F2C023DA 14. Remove the C-ring [1] and pin [2], and remove the gear (lower front) [3]. NOTE • Use care not to lose the pin. A01GF2C541DA 15. Remove two screws [1] and remove the metal bracket [2].
  • Page 950 Field Service Ver. 3.0 Jan. 2008 3. Other 16. Remove the C-ring [1] and remove the gear (upper front) [2]. A01GF2C543DA 17. Remove two screws [1] and remove elevator mounting plate (front) [2]. A01GF2C544DA 18. Remove two screws [1] and remove the belt holder [2].
  • Page 951 3. Other Field Service Ver. 3.0 Jan. 2008 B. Adjustment of lever installation position 1. Install all components excepting for elevator motor assy. NOTE • Fit the hole of the elevator mount- ing plate (front/back) [1] and the hole of the elevator tray [2], and install them by fixing the front and back along.

  • Page 952: Shutter Drive Gear

    Field Service Ver. 3.0 Jan. 2008 3. Other 3.4.21 Shutter drive gear 1. Remove the tray unit. See P.25 2. Remove the tray unit front cover. See P.23 3. Remove the tray unit rear cover. See P.23 4. Remove four screws [1] and remove the shutter drive gear assy [2].

  • Page 953: Duplex Guide Solenoid

    3. Other Field Service Ver. 3.0 Jan. 2008 3.4.22 Duplex guide solenoid 1. Remove the finisher unit. See P.28 2. Remove the finisher unit rear cover. See P.20 3. Remove the finisher unit upper cover. See P.21 4. Remove two saddles [1] and discon- nect the connector [2].
  • Page 954 Field Service Ver. 3.0 Jan. 2008 3. Other A. Adjustment 1. Loosen the screw [1]. 2. Move the mounting plate up and down until the space A reaches specification, and tighten the screw [1]. Specification: 3.5 mm (Tolerance: + 0.5 mm) NOTE •...

  • Page 955: Fs Control Board

    3. Other Field Service Ver. 3.0 Jan. 2008 3.4.23 FS control board 1. Remove the tray unit. See P.25 2. Remove four screws [1] and remove the cover [2]. 9J08F2C034DA 3. Disconnect all the connectors on the FS control board. 4.

  • Page 956: Adjustment/Setting

    Field Service Ver. 3.0 Jan. 2008 4. How to use the adjustment section Adjustment/Setting How to use the adjustment section • “Adjustment/Setting” contains detailed information on the adjustment items and proce- dures for this machine. • Throughout this “Adjustment/Setting,” the default settings are indicated by “ ”. Advance checks •...

  • Page 957: Sensor Check

    5. Sensor Check Field Service Ver. 3.0 Jan. 2008 Sensor Check Check procedure A. Procedure 1. Call the Service Mode to the screen. See P.338 of the main body service manual. 2. Touch [State Confirmation]. 3. Touch [Sensor Check]. 4. Touch two times [ ]. 5.1.1 Sensor check screen •...

  • Page 958: Sensor Check List

    Field Service Ver. 3.0 Jan. 2008 5. Sensor Check 5.1.2 Sensor check list Operation characteristics/ Symbol Panel display Part/signal name panel display Paper Paper not Carrying Paper Passage Entrance sensor present present Paper Paper not Middle Paper Passage Transport sensor present present Not at...

  • Page 959: Finisher Operations

    6. Finisher operations Field Service Ver. 3.0 Jan. 2008 Finisher operations CB-FN adjustment 6.1.1 Finisher Check A. Entering Finisher 1. Call the Service Mode to the screen. See P.338 of the main body service manual. 2. Touch [Finisher]. 3. Touch [CB-FN adjustment]. 4.
  • Page 960 Field Service Ver. 3.0 Jan. 2008 6. Finisher operations (3) Tray Up • The elevator tray is raised to bin 1. (Bin 1 → Additional bin → Bin 2) → The exit opens. → The shutter closes. → The paper output tray is raised to bin 1. →...

  • Page 961: Punch Regist Loop Size

    6. Finisher operations Field Service Ver. 3.0 Jan. 2008 (13) Accommodation Paddle • Drive the storage paddle two turns → The operation is finished, (14) Output Paddle • Drive the exit paddle one turn → The operation is finished, 6.1.2 Punch Regist Loop Size NOTE This adjustment must be made in any of the following cases:...

  • Page 962: Punch Horizontal Position

    Field Service Ver. 3.0 Jan. 2008 6. Finisher operations 6.1.3 Punch Horizontal Position 1. Set the copier into the hole punch <Inch area: 2 holes> <Inch area: 3 holes> mode and make a 1-sided copy from a 1-sided original. 2. Measure width A on the copy and check to see if the measured dimen- sion falls within the specified range.

  • Page 963: Punch Option Setting

    6. Finisher operations Field Service Ver. 3.0 Jan. 2008 Punch option setting • To set installation and model of the punch kit. Functions • To set the number of holes to be made by the punch kit installed. • Use when the punch kit is installed. •...

  • Page 964: Mechanical Adjustment

    Field Service Ver. 3.0 Jan. 2008 7. Mechanical adjustment Mechanical adjustment Punch hole deviance adjustment (PK-515) NOTE Make this adjustment after any of the following procedures has been performed. • When the punch kit has been replaced. • When the punch kit has been removed. 1.

  • Page 965: Staple Position Adjustment

    7. Mechanical adjustment Field Service Ver. 3.0 Jan. 2008 Staple position adjustment NOTE Make this adjustment after any of the following procedures has been performed. • When the stapler has been replaced. • When staple position is misaligned. 1. Set the staple mode and make a 1-point tilted staple copy.
  • Page 966 Field Service Ver. 3.0 Jan. 2008 7. Mechanical adjustment 4. Open the front door. 5. Turn the dial [1], and move the sta- pler forward. 6. Loosen the screw [2], and remove the cover [3]. 9J08F2C518DA 7. Loosen two adjustment screws [1] and move the stapler unit [2] in the direction of the arrow to make the adjustment.

  • Page 967: Staple Home Position Sensor Position Adjustment

    7. Mechanical adjustment Field Service Ver. 3.0 Jan. 2008 Staple home position sensor position adjustment NOTE Make this adjustment after any of the following procedures has been performed. • When the stapler has been replaced. • When staple position is misaligned. 1.

  • Page 968: Adjustment Of Clearance Between Stapler And Fd Stopper

    Field Service Ver. 3.0 Jan. 2008 7. Mechanical adjustment Adjustment of clearance between stapler and FD stopper NOTE Make this adjustment after any of the following procedures has been performed. • When stapler fails to move appropriately. 1. Check the clearance between the stapler unit [1] and the FD stopper [2] is within the specified range.
  • Page 969 7. Mechanical adjustment Field Service Ver. 3.0 Jan. 2008 Blank Page...

  • Page 970: Troubleshooting

    Field Service Ver. 3.0 Jan. 2008 8. Jam display Troubleshooting Jam display Misfeed display • When a paper misfeed occurs, the misfeed message, misfeed location, and paper loca- tion are displayed on the touch panel of the machine. [3], [4] [1], [2], [5] A01GF4C501DA Display...

  • Page 971: Sensor Layout

    8. Jam display Field Service Ver. 3.0 Jan. 2008 Sensor layout 9J08F4C501DA Transport sensor Entrance sensor Storage tray detect sensor...

  • Page 972: Solution

    Field Service Ver. 3.0 Jan. 2008 8. Jam display Solution 8.3.1 Initial check items • When a paper misfeed occurs, first perform the following initial check items. Check Item Action Does the paper meet product specifications? Change the paper. Is paper curled, wavy, or damp? See “Solution when paper curl occurs”...
  • Page 973 8. Jam display Field Service Ver. 3.0 Jan. 2008 8.3.3 Transport section misfeed A. Detection timing Type Description The entrance sensor (PS1) is not turned ON even after the set period of time has elapsed after the copier’s paper exit sensor (PS25) is turned ON by the paper.

  • Page 974: Exit Section Misfeed

    Field Service Ver. 3.0 Jan. 2008 8. Jam display 8.3.4 Exit section misfeed A. Detection timing Type Description The transport sensor (PS2) is not turned ON even after the set period of time has elapsed after the entrance sensor (PS1) is turned ON by the paper.

  • Page 975: Finisher Staple Misfeed

    8. Jam display Field Service Ver. 3.0 Jan. 2008 8.3.6 Finisher staple misfeed A. Detection timing Type Description The staple home position sensor in the staple unit is not turned ON even Finisher staple misfeed after the set period of time has elapsed after the staple motor rotates for- detection ward, and then the staple motor rotates backward, and the staple home position sensor in the staple unit is turned ON within the set period of time.

  • Page 976: Malfunction Code

    Field Service Ver. 3.0 Jan. 2008 9. Malfunction code Malfunction code Trouble code • The machine’s CPU performs a self-diagnostics function that, on detecting a malfunction, gives the corresponding malfunction code and maintenance call mark on the touch panel. Code Description Detection timing •...
  • Page 977 9. Malfunction code Field Service Ver. 3.0 Jan. 2008 Code Description Detection timing • The shutter home position sensor (PS14) is not turned OFF even after the set period of time has elapsed after the shutter motor (M8) is energized (beginning of shutter-opening opera- tion).

  • Page 978: Solution

    Field Service Ver. 3.0 Jan. 2008 9. Malfunction code Solution 9.2.1 C1004: FNS communication error Relevant electrical parts FS control board (FSCB) WIRING DIAGRAM Location Step Action Control signal (Electrical component) Disconnect and then connect the power cord. Turn OFF the main power switch, wait —...

  • Page 979: C1190: Aligning Plate 1 Drive Failure

    9. Malfunction code Field Service Ver. 3.0 Jan. 2008 9.2.3 C1190: Aligning plate 1 drive failure 9.2.4 C1191: Aligning plate 2 drive failure Relevant electrical parts Align motor/1 (M5) FS control board (FSCB) Align motor/2 (M6) Alignment home position sensor/1 (PS7) Alignment home position sensor/2 (PS8) •...

  • Page 980: C11A0: Paper Holding Drive Failure

    Field Service Ver. 3.0 Jan. 2008 9. Malfunction code 9.2.5 C11A0: Paper holding drive failure Relevant electrical parts Exit paddle solenoid (SD2) FS control board (FSCB) Exit paddle home position sensor (PS6) WIRING DIAGRAM Location Step Action Control signal (Electrical component) Check the SD2 connector for proper con- —...

  • Page 981: C11A3: Shutter Drive Failure

    9. Malfunction code Field Service Ver. 3.0 Jan. 2008 9.2.7 C11A3: Shutter drive failure Relevant electrical parts Shutter motor (M8) Relay board/1 (REYB/1) Shutter home position sensor (PS14) FS control board (FSCB) WIRING DIAGRAM Location Step Action Control signal (Electrical component) Check the M8 connector for proper con- —...

  • Page 982: C11B2: Staple Drive Failure

    Field Service Ver. 3.0 Jan. 2008 9. Malfunction code 9.2.9 C11B2: Staple drive failure Relevant electrical parts Staple unit FS control board (FSCB) WIRING DIAGRAM Location Step Action Control signal (Electrical component) Check the staple unit connector for proper connection and correct as neces- —...

  • Page 983: C1301: Finishing Option Cooling Fan Motor Failure

    9. Malfunction code Field Service Ver. 3.0 Jan. 2008 9.2.11 C1301: Finishing option cooling fan motor failure Relevant electrical parts Cooling fan motor (FM9) FS control board (FSCB) WIRING DIAGRAM Location Step Action Control signal (Electrical component) Check the FM9 connector for proper con- —...

  • Page 984: Cc155: Finisher Rom Failure

    Field Service Ver. 3.0 Jan. 2008 9. Malfunction code 9.2.13 CC155: Finisher ROM failure Relevant electrical parts FS control board (FSCB) WIRING DIAGRAM Location Step Action Control signal (Electrical component) Disconnect and then connect the power cord. Turn OFF the main power switch, wait —...
  • Page 985 9. Malfunction code Field Service Ver. 3.0 Jan. 2008 Blank Page...
  • Page 986 SERVICE MANUAL FIELD SERVICE 2008.01 Ver. 2.0...
  • Page 987 Revision history After publication of this service manual, the parts and mechanism may be subject to change for improvement of their performance. Therefore, the descriptions given in this service manual may not coincide with the actual machine. When any change has been made to the descriptions in the service manual, a revised version will be issued with a revision mark added as required.
  • Page 988 Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jan. 2008 CONTENTS MT-502 Outline Product specification ....................1 Maintenance Other ........................3 Disassembly/adjustment prohibited items ............3 Disassembly/Assembly/Cleaning list (Other parts)..........4 2.2.1 Disassembly/Assembly parts list..............4 2.2.2 Cleaning parts list ..................4 Disassembly/Assembly procedure................ 4 2.3.1 Rear cover/Right door ...................
  • Page 989 Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jan. 2008 Blank Page...

  • Page 990: Outline

    Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jan. 2008 1. Product specification Outline Product specification A. Type Name Mailbin kit Installation Install at the top section of the finisher elevator tray. Number of bins 4 bins Number of sheets stored per bin 125 sheets (Total 500 sheets) (90 g/m , 24 lb) Plain paper Storable paper...
  • Page 991 1. Product specification Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jan. 2008 Blank Page...

  • Page 992: Maintenance

    Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jan. 2008 2. Other Maintenance Other Disassembly/adjustment prohibited items A. Paint-locked screws NOTE • To prevent loose screws, a screw lock in blue or green series color is applied to the screws. • The screw lock is applied to the screws that may get loose due to the vibrations and loads created by the use of machine or due to the vibrations created during transportation.

  • Page 993: Disassembly/Assembly/Cleaning List (Other Parts)

    2. Other Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jan. 2008 Disassembly/Assembly/Cleaning list (Other parts) 2.2.1 Disassembly/Assembly parts list Section Part name Ref. page Rear cover Front cover Exterior parts Upper cover Right door Paper output tray 2.2.2 Cleaning parts list Section Part name Ref.

  • Page 994: Front Cover/Upper Cover/Paper Output Tray

    Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jan. 2008 2. Other 2.3.2 Front cover/Upper cover/Paper output tray 4510F2C507DA 1. Remove the screw [1] and remove the front cover [2]. 2. Remove the rear cover. See P.4 3. Remove the upper cover [3]. 4. Remove the paper output trays [4]. Cleaning procedure NOTE •...
  • Page 995 2. Other Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jan. 2008 Blank Page...

  • Page 996: Adjustment/Setting

    Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jan. 2008 3. How to use the adjustment section Adjustment/Setting How to use the adjustment section • “Adjustment/Setting” contains detailed information on the adjustment items and proce- dures for this machine. • Throughout this “Adjustment/Setting,” the default settings are indicated by “ ”. Advance checks Before attempting to solve the customer problem, the following advance checks must be made.

  • Page 997: Sensor Check

    4. Sensor check Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jan. 2008 Sensor check Check procedure A. Procedure 1. Call the Service Mode to the screen. See P.338 of the main body service manual. 2. Touch [State Confirmation]. 3. Touch [Sensor Check]. 4. Touch three times [ ]. 4.1.1 Sensor check screen •...

  • Page 998: Sensor Check List

    Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jan. 2008 4. Sensor check 4.1.2 Sensor check list Operation characteristics/ panel display Symbol Panel display Part/signal name Paper Paper not PS10 Paper Passage 1 Lower transport sensor present present Paper Paper not Paper Passage 2 Upper transport sensor present present...

  • Page 999: Finisher Operations

    5. Finisher operations Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jan. 2008 Finisher operations Entering Finisher Check 1. Call the Service Mode to the screen. See P.338 of the main body service manual. 2. Touch [Finisher]. 3. Touch [CB-FN adjustment]. 4. Touch [Finisher Check]. 5.

  • Page 1000: Troubleshooting

    Field Service Ver. 2.0 Jan. 2008 6. Jam display Troubleshooting Jam display Misfeed display • When misfeed occurs, message, misfeed location “Blinking” and paper location “Light- ing” are displayed on the touch panel of the main body. 4510F4C507DA Display Code Misfeed location Misfeed access location Action...

This manual is also suitable for:

Bizhub c253Bizhub c203

Table of Contents